Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 240

F A N U C 1 0 / 1 0 0 series

F A N U C 1 1 / 1 1 0 series
F A N U C 1 2 / 1 2 0 series

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
(APPENDIXES)

B- 5 4 8 1 O E /01
© F A N U C LTD, 1986
/'
This manual describes the following products

Name of products Abbrebiation

FANUC 1OT-MODEL A 10T-A


10T
FANUC 1OT-MODEL F 10T-F 10 series

FANUC 10M-MODEL A 10M-A 10M

FANUC 1IT-MODEL A 11T-A 11T

FANUC 11TT-M0DEL A 1ITT-A


11TT
FANUC 11TT-MODEL F 11TT-F 11 series

FANUC 11M-M0DEL A 11M-A


11M
FANUC 11M-M0DEL F 11M-F

FANUC 12T-MODEL A 12T-A 12T


12 series
FANUC 12M-M0DEL A 12M-A 12M

a
/ This manual describes the following products:

Name of products Abbrebiation

FANUC 1QT-M0DEL A 10T-A


10T
FANUC 10T-M0DEL F 10T-F 10 series

FANUC 10M-MODEL A 10M-A 10M

FANUC 11T-MODEL A 11T-A 11T

FANUC 11TT-MODEL A 11TT-A


1 ITT
FANUC 11TT-MODEL F 11TT-F 11 series

FANUC 11M-M0DEL A 11M-A


11M
FANUC 11M-MODEU F 11M-F

FANUC 12T-MODEL A 12T-A 12T


12 series
FANUC 12M-MODEL A 12M-A 12M

/
CONTENTS

1 FUNCTIONS AND TAPE FORMAT LIST ............ .


2 RANGE OF COMMAND VALUE .................... .
3 NOMOGRAPHS ................................ .
4 TAPE JOINING ............ .................
5 STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN RESET
6 PARAMETERS ................ ........... ....
1. Parameter Display .......... ..........
2. Parameter Setting ...................
3. Parameter Tape Punch ................. .
4. Descriptions of Parameters ............
7 CODES USED IN PROG R A M ................ .
8 LIST OF INTERNAL CODES OF KANJI AND HIRAGANA
9 G CODE TABLE ........................ .....
10 ERROR CODE TABLE ................. ........
11 WARNING MESSAGE LIST ............ ..... .
12 LIST OF OPERATIONS ........................
13 LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS ......... ..........
APPENDIX 1

A PP EN D IX 1 FU N CTIO N AND T A P E FO R M A T LIS T

The symbols in the list represent the following.


IP _______ : X _______ Y _______ Z ______ A .. . _____
As seen above, the format consists of a combination of arbitary axis
addresses among X, Y, Z, A, B, C, U, V, and W.

x: First basic axis (X usually)


y: Second basic axis (Y usually)
z: Third basic axis (Z usually)
a: One of arbitary addressed
6: One of arbitary addressed
Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
-Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
APPENDIX 1

K-'
; \
-

2
APPENDIX 1

Functions Illustrations Tape format

Command in machine G53 IP


coordinate system
(G53)

Single G60 IP
direction
positioning
(G60)
(10M/11M/12M)

Selection of work G54


coordinate sysetm Work IP
(G54 - G59) zero 1I7 . .G59
‘point I ^ ork
offset coordinate
system
Machine
coordinate
system

Inch/metrie Inch input G20;


conversion Metric input G21;
(G20, G21)

Stored stroke (XZ) G22 X__Z__I__K_


check G23;... Cancel
(G22, G23)
(10T/11T/1ITT/12T)
(IK)

Stored stroke G22 X _ Y _ Z __I__J__K_


check (X Y Z) G23;... Cancel
(G22, G23)
(10М/1Ш/12М)

( I J K)
Л,

Reference point G«7 IP_


return
check (G27)

Start point

Reference point G28 IP__ ;


return (G28)
2nd, 3rd, 4th
reference point
Reference point

G30 P jJ
3 IP_

return (G30) Intermediate


point Start
point

Return from Reference point G29 IP


reference
point (G29)
Intermediate point
APPENDIX 1

Functions Illustrations Tape format

Skip function G30 те


ip
(G31) Start
point Skip
signal

Thread cutting Even lead thread cutting


(G33) G33 IP F Q :
Q: Thread cutting start
point shift angle
Inch thread cutting
G33 IP E Q ;
E: Threads per inch

Programmable G51.1 IP
mirror image Mirror G50.1; . Cancel
(G50.1, G51.1) i
IP

Cutting mode/ G64 ; Cutting mode


Exact stop 0 64 G60 ; Exact stop mode
mode 4-

Г \ Г У \

Custom macro One-shot call


(G65, G6 6 , G65 P__<Argument assignment^
Macro
G66.1, G67) P: Program No.
o_ ;
Modal call
G65P_;
M99 ; iG66 | p <Argument
|G66.1J __ assignment:»; (
G67; ... Cancel

Coordinate ( G17 Xp__Xp__'


system G68 I G18 Zp__Xp__ R a;
rotation l Yp!h_ Z p _
(G6 8 , G69) G69;... Cancel
(10M/11M/12M) U y) ♦
-----------------
(In case o f X-Y-f lane)

Canned cycles See "Canned G80;... Cancel


for drilling cycle for G83.li
(G83.1, G84.1, drilling". G 84.1
G86.1, G80 - G89) G8 6 .1 x y z__
(10T/11T/11TT/ G81 P__Q__R__F_
12T) : L__;
G89

- 4 -
APPENDIX 1

Functions Illustrations Tape format

Canned cycles See "Canned G80; . . . Cancel


for drilling cycle". G73
(G73, G74 , G74
G76, G80 - G76 x y z
G89) G81 P__Q _ R _ F __ L__ ;
(10M/11M/12M)
G89

Absolute/ G90 ; Absolute


incremental G91 ; Incremental
programming G90 ; Combined use
(G90/G91)

Change of work G92 w ;


coordinate (G92) k.

Inverse time/ 1 /min G93 F ; Inverse time


Per-minute mm/min inch/min G94 F ; Feed per minute
feed/Per- mm/rev • inch/rev G95 F ; Feed per revolution
revolution
feed (G93,
G94, G95)

Initial point G 98
1 puilik
G98 ;

return/R Point G99 ;

R point return
G 99
(G98, G99) R point

L,p U U U

Constant surface G96 S__ ;


speed control N(ipm) / G97 ; . . . Cancel
(G96, G97)

1 *

iG35lXp Yp I
Circular threading
G17 i G361
(G35, G36)
(10T/11T/11TT/12T) ÎG351Xp Zp I
G18 \G36j K ~ F — —

«5D G19 |
iG35lYp Zp J
g36J K ~ F ^ ; —

Hypothetical axis XP fG17 Xp Yp |

interpolation ÎG021 G18 Zp Xp ;

(G07) IG03J ( g 19 Yp Zp j
(10T/I1T/11TT/12T) ^ --------------------------------------------*"ZP

- 5 -
/

APPENDIX 1

- 6 -

i
APPENDIX 1

Functions Illustrations Tape format

Mirror image for G6 8 : Mirror image for double


double turret turrent ON
(G6 8 , G69) G69: Mirror image cancel
(10T/11T/11TT/
12T)

Balance cut G6 8 : Balance cut mode


(G6 8 , G69) G69: Balance cut mode cancel
(11TT)

Automatic tool rG3 7.1 r


compensation 1G37.2 a ;
(10T/11T/11TT/ Start Measuring position lG37.3 >
point reacJlsignal
12T) • |----- ■? Measuring
|_ - | point
Compensation
amount

Tool length Measuring position G37 Z ;


reach signal
measurement
(G37)
-
(10M/11M/12M)
Start Measuring
point point

- 7 -
APPENDIX 2

APPENDIX 2 RANGE OF COMMAND V A LU E

Table 1 (a) Linear axis


(in case of metric thread for feed screw and metric input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B

Least input increament 0 . 0 1 mm 0 . 0 1 mm


or *1
0 .0 0 1 mm
Least command increment 0 . 0 1 mm 0 . 0 0 1 mm

Interpolation unit 0.005 mm 0.0005 mm

Max. programmable *2 ± 999999.99 mm ± 99999.999 mm


dimension

Max. rapid traverse *3 240000 mm/min 24000 mm/min

Feedrate range *3 0.0001 - 0.0001 -


240000 mm/min 24000 mm/min

0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 1, 0 .0 0 1 , 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 ,
Incremental feed *4 1 0 , 1 0 0 , 1000 1, 1 0 , 100
mm/step mm/step 10

Tool compensation 0 - ± 999.99 mm 0 - ± 999.999 mm

Backlash compensation *5 0 - ± 9999 pulse 0 - ± 9999 pulses

Dwell time 0 - 99,999.999sec 0 - 99999.999sec

- 8 -
APPENDIX 2

Table 1 (b) Linear axis


(in case of metric threads for feed screw and inch input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B

Least input increament 0 . 0 0 1 inch 0 . 0 0 1 inch


or *1
0 . 0 0 0 1 inch

Least command increment 0 . 0 1 mm 0 . 0 0 1 mm

Interpolation unit 0.0005 inches 0.00005 inches

Max. programmable *2 ± 39370.078 ± 3937.0078


dimension inches inches

Max. rapid traverse *3 240000 mm/min 24000 mm/min

Feedrate range *3 0.00001 - 0 .0 0 0 0 1 -


9600 inch/min 960 inch/min

0 .0 0 1 , 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 0 .0 0 0 1 , 0 .0 0 1 ,
Incremental feed *4 1 , 10 , 100 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 1 ,
inch/step 10 inch/step

Tool compensation 0 - ± 99.999 0 - ± 99.9999


inches inches

Backlash compensation *5 0 - ± 9999 pulse 0 - ± 9999 pulses

Dwell time *3 0 - 99999.999sec 0 - 99,999.999sec

- 9 -
APPENDIX 2

Table 1 (c) Linear axis


(in case of inch threads for feed screw and inch input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B

Least input increament 0 . 0 0 1 inch 0 . 0 0 1 inch


or *1
0 . 0 0 0 1 inch

Least command increment 0 . 0 0 1 inch 0 . 0 0 0 1 inch

Interpolation unit 0.0005 inches 0.00005 inches

Max. programmable *2 ± 99999.999 ± 9999.9999


dimension inches inches

Max. rapid traverse *3 24000 inch/min 2400 inch/min

Feedrate range *3 0.00001 - 0.00001 -


24000 inch/min 2400 inch/min

0 .0 0 1 , 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 0 .0 0 0 1 , 0 .0 0 1 ,
Incremental feed *4 1 , 1 0 , 100 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 1 ,
inch/step 10 inch/step

Tool compensation *5 0 - ± 99.999 0 - ± 99.9999


inches inches

Backlash compensation 0 - ± 9999 pulse 0 - ± 9999 pulses

Dwell time 0 - 99999.999sec 0 - 99,999.999sec

10
APPENDIX 2

Table 1 Id) Linear axis


(in case of inch thread for feed screw and metric input)

Increment system

IS-A IS-B

Least input increament 0 . 0 1 mm 0 . 0 1 mm


or *1
0 . 0 0 1 mm

Least command increment 0 . 0 0 1 inch 0 .0 0 0 1 inch

Interpolation unit 0.005 mm 0.0005 mm

Max. programmable *2 ± 999999.99 mm ± 99999.999 mm


dimension

Max. rapid traverse *3 24000 inch/min 2400 inch/min

Feedrate range *3 0.0001 - 0.0001 -


600000 mm/min 60000 mm/min

0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 1 , 0 .0 0 1 , 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 ,
Incremental feed *4 1 0 , 1 0 0 , 1000 1 , 1 0 , 100
mm/step mm/step

Tool compensation 0 - ± 999.99 mm 0 - ± 999.999 mm

Backlash compensation *5 0 - ± 9999 pulses 0 - ± 9999 pulses

Dwell time 0 - 99,999.999sec 0 - 99999.999sec

11
APPENDIX 2

Table 1 (e) Rotary axis

Increment system

IS-A IS-B

Least input increament 0 . 0 1 deg 0 . 0 1 deg


or *1
0 .0 0 1 deg
Least command increment 0 . 0 1 deg 0 . 0 0 1 deg

Interpolation unit 0.005 deg 0.0005 deg

Max. programmable *1 ± 999999.99 deg ± 99999.999 deg


dimension

Max. rapid traverse *3 24000 deg/min 2400 deg/min

Feedrate range *3 0.0001 - 0.0001 -


240000 deg/min 24000 deg/min

0 .0 1 , 0 .1 , 1 , 0 .0 0 1 , 0 .0 1 , 0 .1 ,
Incremental feed *4 1 0 , 1 0 0 , 1000 1 , 1 0 , 100
deg/step deg/step

Tool compensation 0 - ± 999.99 deg 0 - ± 999.999 deg

Backlash compensation *5 0 - ± 9999 pulse 0 - ± 9999 pulses

Dwell time 0 - 99,999.999sec 0 - 99999.999sec

Note to Table (a) - (e)

*1 Selected by parameters for each axis.


Certain functions are not applicable for axes with different increment
systems (e.g. circular interpolation, tool nose radius compensation,
etc.)
*2 When giving commands for axes of different increment systems in the
same block, limitations are set by the smallest value.
*3 The feed rate range shown above are limitations depending on CNC
interpolation capacity. When regarded as a whole system, limitations,
depending on the servo system, must also be considered.
*4 In case of BMI interface, incremental feed amount can be specified by
setting amount (parameter setting.)
*5 The unit of backlash compensation is detection unit.

12
APPENDIX 3

A P P EN D IX 3 NOM OGRAPHS

3.1 Incorrect Threaded Length


The leads of a thread are generally incorrect in 6 ^ and 6 2 » as shown in
Fig. 1, due to automatic acceleration and deceleration.
Therefore, distance allowances must be made to the extent of 6 ^ and 62
in a program.

Fig. 1 Incorrect threaded length

(1) 62 is determined by cutting speed V (mm/sec) and time constant


(Tl) of the servo system as shown below.
62 = Tl »V(mm) ............................................. (1)
where Tl is in sec., and V is in mm/sec.
V is determined by thread lead L and spindle speed R as shown
below.
V = R(rpm).L(mm)/60
L(mm) .................................... Lead of thread
R(rpm) ................................... Spindle-speed
Time constant TL (sec.) of the servo system: Usually 0.033 sec.

(2) How is determined


The value of 6 ^ is determined by the cutting speed V in
thread cutting, time constant Tl for the servo system, and thread
accuracy "a" as shown below.

«1 = |t - Tl + Tl exp(- tY ) } V (pules) ................ (2)

a = exp (- ^ ) ........................................... (3)

The lead at the beginning of thread cutting is shorter than the


specified lead, L, and the following lead error is AL.
Then,

AL

When the value of "a" is determined, the time lapse, t, can be


calculated by formula (3) until the thread accuracy is attained . The time
"t" is substituted in (2) to determine Constants V, Tl and T2 are
determined in the same way as they are for 6
Since the calculation of 6 ^ is rather complex, a nomography is provided
on the following pages. Instructions on how to read the appropriate
value on the nomography is shown below.

13 -
APPENDIX 3

tfi (V = 10mm/sec)

First specify the class and the lead of a thread. The thread accuracy,
a, will be obtained a t ® , and depending on the time constant of the cutting
feed acceleration/deceleration, the 6 ^ value when V = 10 mm/sec will be
obtained a t © . Then, depending on the speed of thread cutting, the approach
distance 6 ^ will be obtained at © for other speeds than 10 mm/sec.
The equation of dj, 62 is used when the acceleration/deceleration time
constant for cutting feed is 0 .

(2) 6 1 = T i P (-1-lna) = 6 2* (-1-lna)

* When time constant T of the servo system is 0.033 sec.

An "a" indicates the error allowances. And the "-1-lna" follows


as below.

a -1-lna (Example)
0.005 4.298 R=350rpm
0.01 3.605 L=1 mm
0.015 3.200 a=0.01
0.02 2.912
„ 350x1
°2 = ------ 0.194 mm
1800

6l = 2 x 3.605 = 0.701 mm

I
—u I ‘ .1

01 (V = 10mm/sec)

V —40mm/sec V = 30mm/sec V = 20mm/sec V = !Omm/sec


( = 1.57in/sec) ( = I.18in/sec) ( = 0.79in/sec) (=?0.39in/sec)

V —2i n/sec
Servo tim e co n stan t

50msec

33msec

Ln
I

01 i
---- ,AL.
8 (mm) 0 0.007 0.010 0.015 0.020 0.025
Metric thread .
a=<Tr}
JIS class 1 3.33.02.52.011.5 1.2511.0 0.9 0.75 0.6 0.4 0.3 (mm)LeadL
01 JIS class 2 ' 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.75 (mm) Lead L
0.3|(in) 0. 2 0.1 5.0 4.013.5 3.0 2.5 2.0 1.751.5 1.25
Unified thread 4 5 6 7 81910 121314 161820
•* Ridges/inch

APPENDIX 3
JIS 2A
61789
* i i ■
'30121
i . ,
14161820
i i i. i _
JIS 3A — Ridges/inch
(Theoretical
accuracy)
APPENDIX 3

3.3 Tool Path at Corner

(1) Description
When servo system dely (by exponential acceleration/deceleration
at cutting or caused by the motor when a DC servo motor is used) is
accompanied by cornering, a slight deviation is produced between the tool
path (tool center path) and the programmed path as shown in Figure 2 (a).

Program m ed p ath

A ctual to o l p ath

This tool path is determined by the following parameters:


(a) Feedrate (VI, V2)
(b) Corner angle (0)
(c) Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant (Tl) at
cutting.
(d) Loop gain of positioning system
(e) Buffer

The above parameters are used to theoretically analyze the tool path.
When programming, the above items must be considered and programming must be
performed carefully so the shape of the workpiece is within the desired
precision. If the theoretical precision is out of the desired one, a dwell
command shall be specified so that the next block will not be read until the
commanded feedrate becomes zero.

(2) Analysis
The tool path shown in Fig. 2 (b) is analyzed based on the
following conditions:
(a) Feedrate is constant at the block before and after cornering.
(b) The controller has a buffer register.
(The error differs with the reading speed of the tape reader,
number of characters of the next block, etc.)

16
S

APPENDIX 3

(Conditions expressions)

Vxi = Vx cos
Vzi = Vx sin
Vx2 = Vx cos i(i2
Vz2 = Vx sin 1P2
n - (i pi - 'Pi') = 9

(Description of symbol)
V : Feedrate at the block before and after cornering
Vxi: X-axis component of feedrate of preceding block
Vz\: Z-axis component of feedrate of preceding block
Vx2: X-àxis component of feedrate of following block
Vz2: Z-axis component of feedrate of following block
0 : Corner angle
: Angle formed by commanded path direction of preceding block and
X-axis
'¡¡2 : Angle formed by commanded path direction of following block and
X-axis

Initial value calculation


The initial value at which cornering begins, that is, the X and Z
coordinates at the end of command of the controller is determined by the
feedrate and the time constant of the DC servo motor.

Fig. 2 (c) Initial value

Xo = Vx i (T 1 + T2) .......................... (1)


Zo = Vz: (Tl + T 2) ............................. (2)
T1 : Exponential acceleration/deceleration time constant.
T2 : Time constant of positioning system (Inverse of
position Loop gain)

Tool path analysis


The equations below represent the feedrates for the corner section in
X-axis direction and Z-axis direction.

Vx(t) = (Vx2 - Vxi) (1 - T fV^ f 2 (T 1 'exP* (“ ^ ) - T2*exp (- )) + Vxi)

= Vx2 (1- T|'


V^-Lÿ2 (Tl*exp (“ ifY ) “ T2*exp (- ))) .......... (3)

Vz(t) = ^2^ (T1'exP (“ YI ) _ T2'exP (" )) + Vz2 ........... (4)

17
APPENDIX 3

T h erefore, th e co o r d in a tes of th e tool p a th at tim e t are calculated from


the following equations:

X(t) = IJ Vx(t) dt - XO

Vx? - Vx 1
T1 - T2 (T!2*exp (- yy ) - T2*exp (- ))
- V x 2 (T1 + T2 - t) (5)

Z(t) = Vz (t) dt - Z 0

Vz2 - Vz!
~ ~T2 ^T l2'exP (" YT ^ “ T22,exp (- ))
- Vz2 (T1 + T2 - t) .............. ........... ......... (6)

3.4 Radius Direction Error at Circular Cutting

When a DC servo motor is used, the positioning system causes a


delay between the input axis and output axis. Since the tool advances along
the commanded segment, an error is not produced in linear interpolation, but
when especially high speed cutting is performed in circular interpolation,
an error is produced in the radius direction. This error can be obtained as
follows:

Ar : Maximum radius error (mm)


v ': Feedrate (mm/sec)
r : Circule radius (mm)
T1 : Exponential acceleration/
deceleration time constant
(sec) at cutting
T2 : Positioning system time
constant (sec)

(1)

Since the machining radius r (mm) and allowable error Ar (mm) of the
workpiece is given in actual machining, the allowable limit feedrate v
(mm/sec) is determined by equiation (1).
Since the acceleration/deceleration time constant at cutting which is set
by this equipment varies with the machine tool, refer to the machine tool
builder's instruction manual.

18
APPENDIX 4

A PPEN D IX 4 T A P E JOINING

If a loop of punched tape is to be made, a tape is broken, or in


similar cases, two tape sections must be joined. Join these tape section as
described below.
(a) Butt the two tape sections and paste them together. Place the section
on the side from which the tape is fed, on top of the other.
(b) The joint at which the two tape sections overlap must be approx. 3
pitches.

3 Pitches
Tape

Less than 0.270 mm


Direction of feed
I
I
о О О I о о о
I

(c) Make sure the punched holes of the overlapped tape sections at the
joint are correctly aligned. Use special care with the feed holes.

Incorrect Correct

(d) Trim both edges of the joint to smooth them.

(e) Make sure punched holes are not clogged up with paste.

- 19 -
APPENDIX 5

APPENDIX 5 STATUS WHEN TURNING THE POWER ON, WHEN R ESET

o: The status is not changed or the movement is continued,


x: The status is cancelled or the movement is interrupted.

Item When turning power on When reset


Setting data

Offset value o o

Data set by the MDI


o o
setting operation f9*

Parameter o o

Programs in memory o o

Contents in the X X
buffer storage

Display of sequence
X o
number (Note 1)

One shot G code X X


Other data

Initial G codes (For Initial G codes.


G20 and G21, the one G20/G21 and G22/G23,
Modal G code effective before not change.
cutting off the power
remains effective.)

F, E Zero Zero

S.T.M X o

L X X

Work coordinate value Zero o

Movement X X
Operation during execution

Dwell X X

Issurance of M, S X X
and T codes

Depends on system
Tool offset X parameter LUK
(Data N0. 6000)
Tool nose radius
X X
compensation

Storing called X X
subprogram number (Note 2)

Rewind X X

20 -
APPENDIX 5

Item When turning power on When reset

Extinguishes if there Extinguishes if^there


ALM is no cause for the is no cause for the
alarm alarm

NOT READY X x (lights in emergency)


stop)

LSK Lights Lights

BUF Extinguishes Extinguishes


Output signals for LEDs

REFERENCE POINT
RETURN COMPLE­ X o
TION LED

S and T codes X o

M code X 0

M, S and T strobe
X o
signals

Spindle speed signal


(S12 bits/S aganogue o o
signal)

NC ready signal
ON o
(MA, MB)

ON (When other than ON (When other than


Servo ready signal
servo alarm) servo alarm)

CYCLES START LED X X

>
FEED HOLD LED X X

(Note 1) When a program is returned to its head, the start program number
is displayed.
(Note 2) When a reset is performed during execution of a subprogram,
execution returns to the head of the main program by the rewind
operation. Execution cannot be started from the middle of the
subprogrm.

21
APPENDIX 6

A PPEN D IX 6. P A R A M ET ER S

1. P A R A M E T ER D IS P LA Y

1.1 Display Parameters Other than Pitch Compensation Data

1) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and 'CHAPTER' key followed by the 'PARAM'
software key. The parameter screen appears.
2) Enter the data number of the parameter to be displayed and press the 'IMP-NO'
software key.
Instead of entering a data number, the required parameter can be displayed by
the cursor or the page key.

1.2 Display Pitch Error Compensation Data

1) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and 'CHAPTER' key followed by the 'PITCH'
software key. The parameter screen appears.
2) Enter the data number of the parameter to be displayed and press the 'IMP-NO'
software key.
Instead of entering a data number, the required parameter can be displayed by
the cursor or the page key.

2. P A R A M E T ER S ET T IN G

2.1 Parameter Tape Format

2.1.1 Format of parameter tape except pitch error compensation data


Parameters are classified into the following based on data formats:

Data format Data range Remarks

Bit type 0 or 1
Bit axis type 0 or 1
Byte type 0 - +127
Byte axis type 0 - +127
Word type 0 - +32767
Word axis type 0 - +32767
2-word type 0 - +99999999
2-word axis type 0 - +99999999

Note 1) Independent data can be specified for each control axis if axis types
are used.
Note 2) Data ranges are general ranges. Data ranges vary based on parameters.
See the explanation of each parameter for more information.
1) Bit type parameter tape format

N____: The data number is a 4-digit numeric value following N (A


positive integer)
P________: Parameter value (0, 1) is given as an 8-digit numerical value
following P.
A data number contains 8 bit-type parameters. Parameter bit 0
is stored in the first digit and Parameter bit 7 is stored in
the 8 th digit. (positive integer)
;: End of block (LF in ISO code or CR in EIA code)
Note 1) Address N and P should be specified in the order described above.
Note 2) Leading zeros cannot be omitted.

- 22
APPENDIX 6

Example:
N0000 P00010001;
I
3 2) Bit axis type parameter tape format
f N____ A__ P________;
N : The data number is a 4-digit numeric value following N (A
positive integer)
A__: An axis number (1 - 15) (A positive integer)
P : Parameter value (0, 1) is given as an 8-digit numerical value
following P.
A data number contains 8 bit-type parameters. Parameter bit 0
is stored in the first digit and Parameter bit 7 is stored in
the 8th digit. (positive integer)
;: End of block (LF in ISO code or CR in EIA code)
Note 1) Address N, A, and P should be specified in the order described
above.
Note 2) Leading zeros cannot be omitted.
Example:
N0012 A1 P0000011;
N0012 A2 P0000010;
N0012 A3 P0000010;
3) Byte type parameter tape format

N___ : The data number is a 4-digit numeric value following N (A


positive integer)
P____: Parameter value is given as a numerical value following P. (An
integer)
Valid data range depends on the parameters.
;: End of block (LF in ISO code or CR in EIA code)
Note 1) Address N and P should be specified in the order described above.
Note 2) Leading zeros can be omitted.
Example:
N2010 P100;
4) Byte axis type parameter tape format
N____ A__ P________;
N___ : The data number is a 4-digit numeric value following N (A
positive integer)
A__: An axis number (1 - 15) (A positive integer)
P _____ : Parameter value is given as a numerical value following P.
Specified data ranges vary according to parameters.
;: End of block (LF in ISO code or CR in EIA code)
Note 1) Address N, A, and P should be specified in the order described
above.
Note 2) Leading zeros can be omitted
Example:
N1020 A1 P8 8 ;
N1020 A2 P89;
N1020 A3 P90;
The parameters of various axes can be specified in one block as follows:
N020 A1 P88 A2 P89 A3 P90
5) Word type parameter tape format
Same as the byte type parameter tape format.
6) Word axis type parameter tape format
Same as the byte axis type parameter tape format.
7) 2-word type parameter tape format
Same as the byte type parameter tape format.
8) 2-word type parameter tape format
Same as the byte axis type parameter tape format.

- 23 -
APPENDIX 6

Example of a parameter (except pitch error compensation data) tape:


%;
NO PI;
N3 PO;
N10 P10;
N11 PO;

2.1.2 Pitch error compensation data tape format


N_____ P__;
N_____: 5-digit numeric value (10000+ pitch error compensation point
number) after N (positive integer)
P__: Pitch error compensation value after P (An integer)
Valid data range is -7 - 7.
;: End of block (LF in ISO code or CR in EIA code)
Note) Address N and P should be in the order described above.
Example of pitch error compensation data tape (ISO code)
%;
N10000 PI;
N10001 P4;
N10002 P-7;
N10003 P-3;
N10004 P2 ;

2.2 Setting Parameters Using Parameter Tape

1) Put the system into the emergency stop status.


2) Press the software key 'SETTING' to select the setting screen.
3) Enter 8000.
4) Press the software key 'INP-N0.'; data number 8000 parameter is displayed.
5) Enter 1 and press the 'INPUT' software key. PWE=1 is specified and para­
meters can now be specified. The NC enters an alarm status.
6.) Press the function menu key and the soft key is changed over to the function
selection key.
7) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and then press the 'PARAM' software key to
select a screen.
8 ) Mount the parameter tape on the tape reader.
9) Press the software key 'READ' first and the software key 'ALL', then the
parameter tape is read and parameters are set.
10) Temporarily turn the NC power off.

2.3 Setting from MDI

1) Put the screen into the MDI mode or the emergency stop status.
2) Press the software key 'SETTING' to select the setting screen.
3) Enter 8000.
4) Press the software key 'INP-NO.'; data number 8000 parameter is displayed.
5) Enter 1 and press the 'INPUT' software key. PWE=1 is specified and para­
meters can now be specified. The NC enters an alarm status.

- 24
APPENDIX 6

6) Press the function menu key and the soft key is changed over to the function
selection key.
7) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and then press the 'PARAM' software key to
select a screen.
8 ) Enter the data number of the parameter to be set and press the 'INP-NO.'
software key. The screen for the parameter to be set will be displayed.
9) Enter the data to be set and press the 'INPUT' software key; the entered
data is assigned.
Data can be input continuously from the' selected data number by delimiting
data using ';'.
Example:
If 10; 20; 30; 40 are entered and the software key 'INPUT' is pressed, 10,
20, 30, and 40 are sequentially assigned to the parameters starting from
the parameter indicated by the cursor.
10) Repeat steps 7), 8) and 9).
11) After parameters are established, set 0 to the parameter PWE of data number
8000 to inhibit further parameter setting.
12) Reset the NC and release the alarm 'Parameters can be established'. If the
alarm 'A parameter which requires to turn NC power to be temporarily turned
off has been established' appears, turn the NC power off.
(Note 1) In the parameter list (4. Description of parameters), the blank bits
or parameter numbers which are displayed on the CRT display but not
described here are those reserved for future improvement. Please set
these parameters to 0 .
(Note 2) Parameters on the digital servo shall be set under the emergency stop
state. If the data are set under other than the emergency stop state,
the data doesn't become effective.

3. P A R A M ET ER TA P E PUNCH

3.1 Punching All Parameters

1) Connect a punch unit to the I/O interface.


2) Put the system into the EDIT mode.
3) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and then press the 'PARAM' software key to
select a screen.
4) Press the 'PUNCH' software key followed by the 'ALL' software key and all of
the parameters will be punched.

3.2 Punching the Parameters Except Pitch Error Compensation Data

1) Connect a punch unit to the I/O interface.


2) Put the system into the EDIT mode.
3) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and then press the 'PARAM' software key to
select a screen.
4) Press the 'PUNCH' software key followed by the 'PARAM' software key and all
parameters, except the pitch error compensation data/ are punched.

3.3 Punching Pitch Error Compensation Data

1) Connect a punch unit to the I/O interface.


2) Put the system into the EDIT mode.
3) Press the 'SERVICE' software key and then press the 'PITCH' software key to
select a pitch error compensation data screen.
4) Press the 'PUNCH' software key followed by the 'PITCH' software key and all
parameters on the pitch error compensation data are punched.

- 25
APPENDIX 6

4. D ESCR IPTIO N O F P A R A M ETER S

Parameters are classified according to functions.

4.1 Parameters Related to Setting (Data No. 0000 )


4.2 Timer (Data No. 0100 - )
4.3 Parameters Related to Axis Control (Data No. 1000 ^ )
4.4 Parameters Related to the Coordinate System (Data No. 1220 ^ )
4.5 Parameters Related to Feedrate (Data No. 1400 'v )
4.6 Parameters Related to Acceleration/Deceleration Control
(Data No. 1600 ^ )
4.7 Parameters Related to Servo (Data No. 1800 ^ )
4.8 Parameters Related to DI/DO (Data No. 2000 ^ )
4.9 Parameters Related to CRT/MDI and EDIT (Data No. 2200 ^ )
4.10 Parameters Related to Programs (Data No. 2400 'v )
4.11 Parameters Related to Graphic Display A (Data No. 4821 ^ )
4.12 Parameters Related to Reader/puncher Interface (Data No. 5001 ^ )
4.13 Parameters Related to Stroke Limit (Data No. 5200 'v* )
4.14 Parameters Related to Pitch Error Compensation (Data No. 5420 ^ )
4.15 Parameters Related to Inclination Compensation (F11M, F12M)
(Data No. 5461 'v*)
4.16 Parameters Related to Straightness Compensation (F11M, F12M)
(Data No. 5481
4.17 Parameters Related to Spindle Control (Data No. 5600 ^ )
4.18 Parameters Related to Tool Offset (Data No. 6000 ^ )
4.19 Parameters Related to Canned Cycle (Data No. 6200 ^ )
4.20 Parameters Related to Scaling and Coordinate Rotation(Data No. 6400 ^ )
4.21 Parameters Related to Automatic Corner Override (Data No. 6610
4.22 Parameters Related to Uni-Directional Positioning (Data No. 6820 ^ )
4.23 Parameters Related to Custom Macro (Data No. 7000 'V/ )
4.24 Parameters Related to Skip Functions (Data No. 7200 'v )
4.25 Parameters Related to Automatic Tool Offset (10T/11T/12T) and Automatic
Tool Length Measurement (10M/11M/12M) (Data No. 7300 ^ )
4.26 Parameters Related to Interference Check (Data No. 7605 ^ )
4.27 Parameters Related to Tool Life Management (Data No. 7400 ^ )
4.28 Parameters Related to Software Operator's Panel (Data No. 7603
4.29 Parameters Related to Exponential Function Interpolation
(Data No. 7610
4.30 Parameters Related to Index Table Indexing Function (Data No. 7602
4.31 Parameters Related to High Speed Operation (Data No. 7607
4.32 Paarmeters Related to Sequence Number Comparison and Stop
4.33 Parameters Related to Manual Handle Feed (Data No. 7701 'v-)
4.34 Parameters Related to Synchronous/Independent Operation (Data No. 7633
4.35 Parameters Related to Service (Data No. 8000 ^ )

4.1 Parameters Related to Setting

Data number Data

0000 EIA NCR ISP CTV TVC

#7 #6 #5 H #3 #2 #1 № (
Setting entry
Data format: Bit type
TVC Specifies whether TV check is performed
0: Not performed
1: Performed

- 26
APPENDIX 6

CTV Specifies whether the counting of characters for TV check is


performed during control out
0: Performed
1: Not performed
ISP Specifies whether the ISO code contains a parity bit
0: With parity bit
1: Without parity bit
(The parity bit in ISO code is channel 8 of the punched tape.)
NCR In ISO code, end of block code is punched as:
0: LF CR CR
1: LF
EIA Punch code is
0: ISO code
1: EIA code

Data number Data

0010 SBO SBC SBM SB8 SB7 INI

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 n in № (Bit)
Setting entry
Data format: Bit type
INI Input unit
0: Metric input
1: Inch input
SB7 07000 - 07999 programs
0: Do not perform single block stop in custom macro statement
1: Perform single block stop in custom macro statement
(Used to debug custom macros)
SB8 08000 - 08999 programs
0: Do not perform single block stop in custom macro statement
1: Perform single block stop in custom macro statement
(Used to debug custom macros)
SBM All of the programs
0: Do not perform single block stop in custom macro statement
Note that SB7 and SB8 are valid
1: Perform single block stop in custom macro statement
(Used to debug custom macros)
SBC At each hole-machining canned cycle (Not used in 11TT)
0: Single block stop is not performed for each cycle
1: Single block stop is performed for each cycle
(Used if trouble occurred in a canned cycle)
SBO In blocks automatically generated in the NC to correct cutter
compensation or tool nose radius compensation
0: Single block stop is not performed
1: Single block stop is performed
-(Used if trouble occurred when executing cutter compensation/
tool nose radius compensation)

- 27 -

r-
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

0011 HSO TOFS ND8 NE8

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #o (
Setting entry
Data format: Bit type
NE8 08000 - 08999 programs
0: Can be edited
1: Cannot be edited
ND8 During 08000 - 08999 programs execution
0: Executing programs are displayed on the CRT
1: Executing programs are not displayed on the CRT
Set this parameter to 1 if it is not required to display the program text
such as custom macro programs during execution.
T0FS Tool pot number output and tool offset by tool number is:
0: Made. (Tool length compensation and cutter compensation can not
be made by H/D code.)
1: Not made. (Tool length compensation and cutter compensation can
be made by H/D code.)
HS0 By the G10.3 L1/L2 command:
0: Skip the program up to G11.3, and execute the high-speed
machining by using the previously registered data. (Call
operation mode)
1: Convert the commands up to G11.3 into the high-speed machining
data and register it, and then execute the high-speed machining
by using that data. (Register operation mode)

Data number Data

0012 RMVx SCLx MIRx

#7 #6 //5 #4 #3 #2 //1 № (Bit)


Setting entry
Data format: Bit axis type
MIRx Assignment of each axis mirror image
0: Mirror image off (Normal)
1: Mirror image on (Mirror)
SCLx Assignment of each axis scaling validity (for 10M/11M/12M)
0: Invalid
1: Valid
RMVx Controlled axis detach of each axis
0: No available
1: Available
When RMBx (data number 1005) = 1

Data number Data

0020 Input device interface number for foreground

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Assignment of input device number for foreground
0 : Tape reader
1 : CD1 of CRT/MDI unit
2 : CD1 of Master PCB of 10 series
3: CD2 of option card 1 of 10 series (Tape reader)

- 28 -
APPENDIX 6

11: 20mA current type interface (ASR33, ASR44)

Data number Data

0021 Output device interface number for foreground

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Assignment of output device number for foreground
1: CD1 of CRT/MDI unit
2: CD1 of Master PCB of 10 series
11: 20mA current type interface (ASR33, ASR44)

Data number Data

0022 Input device interface number for background

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Assignment of input device number for background
0: Tape reader
1: CD1 of CRT/MDI unit
2: CD1 of Master PCB of 10 series
3: CD2 of option card 1 of 10 series
11: 20mA current type interface (ASR33, ASR44)

Data number Data

0023 Output device interface number for background

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Assignment of output device number for background
1: CD1 of CRT/MDI unit
2: CD1 of Master PCB of 10 series
11: 20mA current type interface (ASR33, ASR44)

4.2 Timer

Data number Data

0100 Timer 1 (Accumulated powering on time hour)

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 min.
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Timer 1
The timer displays and sets accumulated powering on time.

Data number Data

0101 Timer 2 (Accumulated automatic operation hour)

Setting entry (For on 1st tool post in 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 msec

- 29 -
APPENDIX 6

Data range : 0 - 99999999


Timer 2
The timer displays and sets accumulated automatic operation hours.

Data number Data

0102 Timer 3 (Accumulated automatic operation hour)

Setting entry (For on 1st tool post in 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 min.
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Timer 3
The timer displays and sets accumulated automatic operation hours.

Data number Data

0103 Timer 4 (Accumulated cutting time)

Setting entry (For on 1st tool post in 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 60000
Timer 4
The timer displays and sets accumulated cutting time.

Data number Data

0104 Timer 5 (Accumulated cutting time)

Setting entry (For on 1st tool post in 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 minute
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Timer 5
The timer displays and sets accumulated cutting time.

Data number Data

0105 Timer 6 (Accumulated signal ON time)

Setting entry
Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 60000
Timer 6
The timer displays and sets accumulated signal ON time.
One integrating meter which starts through an input signal from the
machine side is provided inside the controller, thus making it
possible to preset this integrating meter.

Data number Data

0106 Timer 7 (Accumulated signal ON time)

Setting entry
Data format: 2-word type

- 30 -
APPENDIX 6

Unit: 1 minute
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Timer 7
i The timer displays and sets accumulated signal ON time.
i
T One integrating meter which starts through an input signal from the
machine side is provided inside the controller, thus making it
possible to preset this integrating meter.

Data number Data

0107 Total number of machined parts

Setting entry
Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 pc.
Data range: 0 - 99999
This parameter displays and sets the accumulated value of total
number of machined parts.

Data number Data

0111 Timer 8 (Accumulated automatic operation hour on


2nd tool post)

Setting entry (For 1ITT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 60000
Timer 8
The timer displays and sets accumulated automatic operation hours on
2nd tool post.

Data number Data


m „ Timer 9 (Accumulated automatic operation hour on
_______ 2nd tool post)________________________________________
Setting entry (For 11TT)
Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 minute
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Timer 9
The timer displays and sets accumulated automatic operation hour on
2nd tool post.

Data number Data

0113 Timer 10 (Accumulated cutting time on 2nd tool post)

Setting entry (For 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 60000
Timer 10
The timer displays and sets accumulated cutting time on 2nd tool
post.

- 31
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

0114 Timer 11 (Accumulated cutting time on 2nd tool post)

Setting entry (For 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Unit: 1 minute
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Timer 11
The timer displays and sets accumulated cutting time on 2nd tool
post.

4.3 Parameters Related to Axis Control

Data number Data

1000 EMI XIK CSZ CIP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
CIP When speed is decelerated, in-position is
0: Not checked (Goes to next block after the specified speed
becomes zero when decelerating the speed)
1: Checked (Goes to next block after the specified speed becomes
zero after confirming that the machine position has reached the
specified position when decelerating the speed)
CSZ In-position check signal input (*CSMZ) is
0: Invalid
1: Valid
XIL In non-linear interpolation type positioning (data number 1400, LRP
= 0), if an axis interlock is applied during positioning
0: Only the axis to which an interlock is applied is stopped.
Other axes keep operating.
1: All axes are stopped
EMI In simultaneous automatic and manual operation
0: Manual operation of cutting axis interrupt is invalid, and
manual operation of set-up interrupt is valid.
1: Both manual operation of cutting axis interrupt and set-up
interrupt are valid.

Data number Data

1001 PRC

#7 H #5 #4 #3 #2 HI ao
Parameter entry (11M/12M)
Data format: Bit type
PRC 0: Axis interchange cannot be made for return from reference point
(G29) .
1: Axis interchange can be made for return from reference point
(G29) .

- 32 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1002 INM

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
INM Machine linear axis detection units
0: Metric
1: Inch

Data number Data

1004 IPRx ISFx ISRx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
ISRx, ISFx Increment system of each axis

ISRx ISFx Least command increment Abbr.

0 0 0.001mm, 0.001 deg or 0.0001 inch IS-B


1 0 0.01mm, 0.01 deg or 0.001 inch IS-A

Always set the least input increment to 0.001 deg (IS-B) for the spindle
positioning (indexing) axis.
IPRx Specifies whether each axis least input increment is multiplied by
10 of least command increment.
0: is not multiplied by 10
1: is multiplied by 10

Increment system Least input increment

IS-A 0.01mm, 0.01 deg or 0.001 inch


IS-B 0.01mm, 0.01 deg or 0.001 inch

Note) If increment system IS-A is used, the least input increment cannot
be multiplied by 10 of least command increment.

Data number Data

1005 RMBx ZNGx EDMx EDPx PLZx ALZx ZMGx ZRNx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
ZRNx Specifies whether each axis reference point return function is
provided
0: Reference point return function is provided
1: Reference point return function is not provided
ZMGx Assigns each axis reference point return method
0: Grid method
1: Magnetic switch method
ALZx Automatic reference point return (G28)
0: Returns to reference point by positioning control (rapid
traverse).

- 33
APPENDIX 6

If reference point return was never performed since the power


was turned on, reference point return is performed with the same
sequence as manual reference point return.
1: Returns to reference point using the same sequence as manual
reference point return. Normally, set to 0.
PLZx When manual reference point return is completed, work coordinate
values are: (Not used in 11TT)
0: Preset only at the set condition (OP signal is OFF).
1: Always preset.
See ZNP in parameter No. 2402 common to all axes.
EDPx Specifies whether each axis + direction external deceleration signal
is valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
EDMx Specifies whether each axis - direction external deceleration signal
is valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
ZNGx Specifies whether each axis machine lock is valid or invalid
0: Invalid
1: Valid
RMBx Specifies whether each axis control axis detach signal and setting
data RMVx (Data No. 0012) are valid
0: Invalid
1: Valid

Data number Data

ZMIx DIAx ROPx ROSx ROTx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
ROTx Specifies whether the axis (rotary axis) requires inch/metric
switching or not
0: The axis requires inch/metric switching (Linear axis)
1: The axis does not require inch/metric switching (Rotary axis)
ROSx Machine coordinate system for stroke check and automatic reference
point return is
0: Linear axis type
1: Rotary axis type
For rotary axis type, the machine coordinate system is normalized to
0 - 360 deg. In this case, the automatic reference point return,
(G28, G30) is performed in the same direction as the manual
reference point return and the amount of movement dose not exceed
one rotation.
Refer to parameter number 1260.
ROPx The machine coordinate system used for stored pitch error compensa­
tion is
0: Linear axis type
1: Rotary axis type
For rotary axis type, the rotation angle for one cycle of stored
pitch error compensation data can be selected. Therefore, the pitch
error can be compensated although the pitch error compensation cycle
is not 360 degrees. See parameter number 5425.

- 34 -
APPENDIX 6

DIAx Specifies whether each axis movement amount is specified by diameter


or radius
0: Radius is specified
1: Diameter is specified
ZMIx Specifies the direction of manual reference point return
0: + direction
1: - direction

Data number Data

1020 Programming name of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type
Assign a program axis name to each control axis according to the following
table:

Specified Specified Specified


Axis name Axis name Axis name
value value value

X 88 A 65 U 85
Y 89 B 66 V 86
Z 90 C 67 W 87

Assign the same program axis name to the axes which are controlled in
parallel axis control. For 10T/11T/11TT/12T, addresses A, U, V, W can not
be used as the programming axis.

Data number Data

1021 Axis number in parallel axis control

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data format: Byte axis type
To distinguish the axes which are operated in parallel axes control,
specify the sequence number of the parallel axes. Assign 0 to non­
parallel axes.

Data number Data

1022 Relates each axis to a basic coordinate system axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type
To determine circular interpolation plane, cutter compensation plane
(10M/11M/12T) or tool nose radius compensation (10T/11T/11TT/12T), G17:
Xp-Yp plane, G18: Zp-Xp plane, G19: Yp-Zp plane and three-dimensional tool
compensation space XpYpZp; each control axis is assigned to a basic
coordinate system axis X, Y, or Z, or to its parallel axis. Only one axis
can be assigned to each of the three basic axes X, Y and Z (but not for
parallel axes). More than one axis can be assigned to parallel axes.
Assign the same value to the parallel controlled axes.

- 35
APPENDIX 6

Specified value Meaning

0 A rotary axis
(Not basic three axes nor parallel axes)
1 Axis X of basic three axes
2 Axis Y of basic three axes
3 Axis Z of basic three axes
5 An axis parallel to axis X
6 An axis parallel to axis Y
7 An axis parallel to axis Z

Data number Data

1023 Servo axis number of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type
Data range: 1 through the number of control axes
Relates each control axis to a servo axis.
Normally, set the same value as the control axis sequence number to the
servo axis number.
Set the servo axis number plus 16 to the C axis when using the spindle
positioning (indexing) function.
Example) In case of X, Z, C (Cs)
Set 16 + 3 + 19.
In case of X, Z, Y, C (Cs)
Set 16 + 4 = 20.

Data number Data

1030 2nd auxiliary function command address

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Specifies an address among A, B, C, U, V, and W to be used for the 2nd
auxiliary function. Note that the address used as a control axis name
cannot be specified as the address of the 2nd auxiliary function.
For 10T/11T/11TT/12T, U, V and W cannot be used for an address as the 2nd
auxiliary function.

Address Specified value Address Specified value

A 65 U 85
B 66 V 86
C 67 w 87

Data number Data

1031 Standard axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
The units of the parameters common to all axes such as dry run rate and FI
digit feed rate vary according to the increment systems.

- 36
APPENDIX 6

In 10/11/12, the increment systems can be selected by a parameter for each


axis. This parameter is employed to refer to the units of these
parameters as those of an increment system of the standard axis. Specify
the sequence number of the axis used as the standard axis.

Data number Data

1041 Axis interchange number

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
The following 6 kinds of axis interchange can be made.
Set the axis interchange number.
Machine axes x, y, z corresponding to program addresses X, Y, Z are as
follows:

Program address
Axis interchange
number
X Y z

0 X y Z

1 X Z y

2 y X z

3 y z X

4 Z X y

5 Z y X

4.4 Parameters Related to the Coordinate System

Data number Data

1220 Each axis external work zero point offset value (10M/11M/12M)

(10T/11T/
Each axis external work coordinate system shift
11TT/12T)
Setting entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:
Increment system
Remarks
IS-A IS-B
Linear axis (in millimeters) 0.01 0.001 mm
Linear axis (in inches) 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: +99999999


This parameter is one of the parameters which gives zero point position in
work coordinate systems (G54 - G59). While work zero point offset values
vary for each work coordinate system, this parameter gives the offset
value common to all of the work coordinate systems.

- 37
APPENDIX 6

Normally, this parameter is set automatically by an input signal (as


external data input) from the machine side.

Data number Data

1221 Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 1

1222 Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 2

1223 Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 3

1224 Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 4

1225 Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 5

1226 Work zero point offset value of work coordinate system 6

Setting entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:
Increment system
Remarks
IS-A IS-B
Linear axis (in millimeters) 0.01 0.001 mm
Linear axis (in inches) 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: +99999999


Work zero point offset values are established for work coordinate systems
1 - 6 (G54 - G59).

Work coordinate
system 6 (G59)

- 38 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1240 Coordinate value of the 1st reference point in the


machine coordinate system

1241 Coordinate value of the 2nd reference point in the


machine coordinate system

1242 Coordinate value of the 3rd reference point in the


machine coordinate system

1243 Coordinate value of the 4th reference point in the


machine coordinate system

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Unit:
Increment system
Remarks
IS-A IS-B
Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm
Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: +99999999


The coordinate values of the 1st through the 4th reference points are
established in the machine coordinate system.

Data number Data

1260 Movement of rotary axis per rotation

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Unit:
Increment system
Remarks
IS-A IS-B
Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm
Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: +99999999


When parameter 1006 ROSx is 1, set the movement of the rotary axis per
rotation for stroke check and reference point return.

- 39 -
APPENDIX 6

4.5 Parameters Related to Feedrate

Data number Data

1400 AOV LRP SKF RPD TDR RDR

if! //6 if5 ifk #3 if 2 if 1 #0 (E


Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
RDR For rapid traverse command, dry run is
0: Invalid
1: Valid
TDR For thread cutting command and tapping command, dry run is
0: Invalid
1: Valid
RPD After power is on and before the reference point return, manual
rapid traverse is
0: Invalid
1: Valid
SKF Feedrate of skip function (G31, G31.1, G31.2, G31.3) is
0: F code rate specified in the program
1: Rate established in the parameter (Data number 1428)
(In case of 10T/11T/11TT/12T, only G31 is possible.)
LRP Positioning (GOO)
0: Non-linear interpolation type positioning (Independent rapid
traverse for each axis)
1: Linear interpolation type positioning (Tool path is straight
line)
AOV 2nd feedrate override is
0: Invalid
1: Valid

Data number Data

1401 RFO HTG NED

//7 #6 #5 if 4 if 3 if 2 #1 if 0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
NED External deceleration is
0: Effective to all feeds
1: Effective only to rapid traverse
HTG In helical interpolation velocity command (of F10M, 11M, 12M)
0: Specify with tangential speed of the arc
1: Specify with the tangential speed including the linear axes
RFO In rapid feed, when cutting feed rate override is 0%
0: Stop
1: Do not stop

- 40 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1410 Dry run rate

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Unit :

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1) , the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 1 - 32767
o In case of BMI interface
Set dry run rate when jog feedrate dial is at 100%.
o In case of FS6 interface
Set dry run rate when jog feedrate dial is at the 22nd position,
o In case of FS3 interface
Set dry run rate of each axis when feedrate override dial is at 130%.
Standard setting value is 500 for a metric machine or 2000 for an inch
machine.

Data number Data

1411 Manual arbitrary angle feed

Parameter entry (10M/11M/12M)


Data format: Word type
Data unit:
Increment system of
standard axis
IS-A IS-B

Metric machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min

Inch machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min

Data range: 1 - 32767


Set the manual arbitrary angle feed rate at the jog feedrate dial 100%.

Data number Data

1412 % value for rapid traverse override FI

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: %
Data range: 0 - 100
% value for rapid traverse override FI is established.

- 41
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1413 Manual handle feed allowed flow

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0-4
When input command from the manual handle exceeds rapid traverse, the
pulses from manual handle exceeded rapid traverse are kept. Set its
allowable value as a manual handle feed allowed flow to this parameter.
Allowed flow = (Rapid traverse rate) *2** (Setting data)/7500
Rapid traverse rate: Feedrate per minute
Normally, set 0.

Data number Data

1414 Magnification n of manual handle feed

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data range: 1 - 200 (1 - 200 magnifications)
Magnification is established when the manual handle feed movement select
signal MP2 is on.
Normally, set 100.

Data number Data

1420 Rapid traverse rate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 100.0 10.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 10.0 1.0 inch/min
Rotary axis 100.0 10.0 deg/min

Data range: 0 - 6000


Set rapid traverse rate under rapid traverse override 100% on each axis.

Data number Data

1421 Rapid traverse override FO rate for each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

- 42 -
APPENDIX 6

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 8 - 32767
Rapid traverse override FO rate is set for each axis.

Data number Data

1422 Maximum feedrate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 100.0 10.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 10.0 1.0 inch/min
Rotary axis 100.0 10.0 deg/min

Data range: 1 - 6000


Maximum feedrate is set for each axis.

Data number Data

1423 Jog feedrate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format : Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 1 - 32767
o In case of BMI interface
Set jog feedrate of each axis when jog feedrate dial is at 100%.
o In case of FS6 interface
Set jog feedrate of each axis when jog feedrate dial is at the 22nd
position.
o In case of FS3 interface
Set jog feedrate of each axis when feedrate override dial is at 130%.
Standard setting value is 500 for a metric system machine or 2000 for an
inch system machine.
When the dry run is set to be effective for the rapid traverse (parameter
1400#0:RDR=1), this parameter specifies the dry run rate of each axis
under RT (Rapid Traverse) signal being off.
Meaning of data is the same as the case of jog.

- 43 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1424 Manual reference point return FM rate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0. 1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 8 - 32767
FM rate by the magnetic switch method manual reference point return is
established for each axis. Linear acceleration is applied to FM rate. It
is unnecessary to set this for grid method reference point return, because
there is no FM rate feed.

f Rate

Data number Data

1425 Manual reference point return FL rate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.

- 44 -
/

APPENDIX 6

Data range: 8 - 32767


Feedrate (FL rate) after deceleration in reference point return is estab­
lished for each axis.

Data number Data

1426 External deceleration rate for cutting feed

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 1 - 32767
External deceleration rate for cutting feed and for linear interpolation
type positioning (GOO) is established.

Data number Data

1427 External deceleration rate at rapid traverse of each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 8 - 32767
External deceleration rate at rapid traverse is established for each axis.

- 45
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1428 Skip function (G31, G31.1 - G31.3) feedrate

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 1 - 32767
Skip function (G31, G 31.1 - G31.3) feedrate is established.
This parameter is valid only if 1 (skip function feed rate is the rate
specified in the parameter) is set to parameter SKF (data number 1400).

Data number Data

1450 FI digit feed resolution

Parameter input (For 10M/11M/12M)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: 1 - 127
The constant to decide the variation of the feedrate when the manual pulse
generator was rotated under an FI digit command
a v - F m a x l (A — 1 O ',
AF " l i T (i " lj 2)
Set n of the above expression; set how many times it is necessary to
rotate the manual pulse generator to make the feedrate Fmaxi.
The Fmaxi of the above expression is the upper limit of the FI digit
command feedrate, set in data number 1460 and 1461.
Fmaxi Upper limit of FI - F4 feedrate (1460)
Fmax2 Upper limit of F5 - F9 feedrate (1461)

Data number Data

FI feedrate

F2 feedrate

F3 feedrate

F4 feedrate

F5 feedrate

- 46
APPENDIX 6

Setting input (For 10M/11M/12M)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: The representative axis input unit is used as the input unit

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric entry 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch entry 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 6000
The feedrate to the FI digit command FI to F9.
When the manual pulse generator is rotated to vary the feedrate under an
FI digit command, the value of this parameter will also vary.

Data number Data

1460 Upper limit of feedrate of FI to F4

1461 Upper limit of feedrate of F5 to F9

Parameter entry (For 10M/11M/12M)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: The input unit of the standard axis is used.

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric entry 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch entry 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 6000
The upper limit of an FI digit command feedrate. When increased by the
manual pulse generator, if the command is an FI digit command of F2 to F4,
the feedrate is clamped at the upper limit of number 1460, and when the
command is an FI digit feed command of F5 to F9 at 1461.

- 47
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1490 Upper feed rate limit value at circular radius of R


Parameter entry (11/12M)
Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Machine of milimeter 100.0 10.0 mm/min


system

Machine of inch system 10.0 1.0 inch/min

Data range: 0 = 6000


This parameter sets the upper limit of the feedrate at the circular radius
set by parameter No. 1492.
This parameter shall be set in case the function "Feedrate clamp by
circular radius" is provided.

Data number Data

1491 Clamped lowest feed rate (RV min) by circular radius


Parameter entry (11/12M)
Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Setting unit IS-A IS-B Unit

Machine of milimeter 100.0 10.0 mm/min


system

Machine of inch system 10.0 1.0 inch/min

Data range: 0 = 6000


With the function "Feedrate clamp by circular radius", upper limit
feedrate becomes slower as the circular radius becomes smaller.
When the upper limit feedrate becomes smaller than the lower limit
feedrate (RV min) by the circular radius, the upper limit feedrate is RV
min.

Data number Data


Circular radius R corresponding to the upper limit
1492
feedrate_______ __________________________________
Parameter entry (11/12M)
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

Setting unit IS-A IS-B Unit

Machine of milimeter 0.01 0.001 mm/min


system

Machine of inch system 0.001 0.0001 inch/min

- 48 -
APPENDIX 6

Data range: 1000 - 99999999


This parameter sets the circular radius corresponding to the upper limit
feedrate set by parameter No. 1492.
This parameter shall be set in case the function "Feedrate clamp by
circular radius" is provided.

Data number Data

1493 Cutting feed rates


Data format: 2-word type
Unit :

Unit

Input by mm 1.0 mm/min

Input by inch 0.01 inch/min

Data range: 0 (Cutting feed rate specification is instructed by the


program.)
1 1 - Max. cutting feed rates
For machines which are not required to change cutting feed rates while
machining, cutting feed rates can be instructed with a parameter. Then,
to instruct cutting feed rates (F code) in the NC command data is not
required any more.
Always turn off power, after this parameter was set.

4.6 Parameters Related to Acceleration/Deceleration Control

Data number Data

1600 JGEx CTEx REXx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
REXx Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration is
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
1: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
CTEx Cutting feed and dry run: (11M/12M)
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
JGEx Jogging feed:
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
1: Exponential acceleration/deceleration
CTEx and JGEx are significant only when the optional function "Linear
Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation" is provided,
while when it is not available, the exponential acceleration/deceleration
are applied regardless of the preset value.

- 49 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1620 Linear type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration


time constant of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 0 - 4000
The linear type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time constant is
established for each axis.

Data number Data

1621 Linear type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration FL


rate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The linear type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration FL rate is
established for each axis.

I «_ Time ____.
1 constant
(Data No. 1620)

- 50 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1622 Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant of


each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 0 - 4000
The cutting feed acceleration/deceleration (exponential type) time
constant is established for each axis. The same value should be set in
this parameter for all of the axes unless it is used for a special
purpose.
If different values are specified, the correct straight line or arc shapes
cannot be obtained.

Data number Data

1623 Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration FL rate of each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis , 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The feed acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each axis.
0 should be set in this parameter for all of the axes unless it is used
for a special purpose.
If other values are set, the correct straight line or arc shapes cannot be
obtained.

Data number Data

1624 Jogging acceleration/deceleration time constant of each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 0 - 4000
The jogging acceleration/deceleration (exponential type) time constant is
established for each axis.

- 51
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1625 Jogging acceleration/deceleration FL rate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The jogging acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established for each
axis.

Data number Data

1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant at thread cutting


cycle of each axis

Parameter entry (10T/11T/12T)


Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 1 - 4000
The exponential type acceleration/deceleration time constant at thread
cutting cycle (G76, G78 (G92 in case of G code system A)) is established
for each axis.
Note) This parameter is used for thread cutting (G33 (G32 in case of G
code system A)) in using acceleration/deceleration before
interpolat ion.

Data number Data

1627 Thread cutting cycle acceleration/deceleration FL rate of


each axis

Parameter entry (F10T/11T/12T)


Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1) , the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The thread cutting cycle acceleration/deceleration FL rate is established
for each axis.

- 52
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1628 Exponential type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration


time constant of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 0 - 4000
The exponential type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
constant is established for each axis.

Data number Data

1629 Exponential type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration


FL rate of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch system machine. 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotary axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above value.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The exponential type rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration FL rate is
established for each axis.

Data number Data

1630 Parameter 1 to establish linear acceleration/deceleration


prior to interpolation

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: According to standard axis (specified in data number 1031
parameter) increment system

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 100.0 10.0 mm/min


Inch system machine 10.0 1.0 inch/min
Rotary axis 100.0 10.0 deg/min

- 53 -
APPENDIX 6

Data range: 1 - 6000


The parameter to establish linear acceleration/deceleration prior to
interpolation is set.

Rate

Parameter 1
(Data No. 1630)

Parameter 2 (Data No. 1631)

Data number Data

1631 Parameter 2 to establish linear acceleration/deceleration


prior to interpolation

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 4000
The time spent to reach the rate specified in parameter 1 is set.
(Note) When either 1630 or 1631 is set to 0, the function of linear
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation becoms
ineffective.

4.7 Parameters Related to Servo

Data number Data

1800 FVF CVR ADR

#7 #6 #5 H #3 #2 #1 . #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
ADR Automatic drift compensation is
0: Not performed
1: Performed
(Note) This parameter is not used in case of digital servo.
CVR If velocity control ready signal VRDY turns on before position
control ready signal PRDY turns on,
0: Servo alarm is not indicated
1: Servo alarm is indicated
Normally, set 1.
FVF In servo off condition
0: Follow-up is not done
1: Follow-up is done

- 54 -
/

APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1802 SVFx PSFx

#7 //6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
PSFx Phase shift amount automatic setting has
0: Not been completed
1: Been completed
If a resolver or inductosyn is used as the position transducer, 0
should be set when the first field adjustment is done or when the
position transducer is replaced and power should be turned off. If
the power is turned on again, the optimal phase shift amount is
automatically set and 1 is set to this parameter.
SVFx Servo off signal is
0: Invalid
1: Valid

Data number Data

1804 DGPRM PLC01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 n n #o
Parameter input
Data format: Bit axis type
PLC01: 0,1 p detecting pulse coder is:
0: Not used
1: Used
DGPRM: With power ON, the digital servo related parameter standard value
is:
0: Set
1: Not set
When this parameter is set to 0 after Type No. of motor is set, the
standard values which comply with Type No. of motor are set automatically
when power is turned ON. At the same time, this parameter is set to "1".

Data number Data

1806 AMR5 AMR4 AMR3 AMR2 AMR1 AMRO

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type

AMR5: The feedback pulse from the plulse coder is:


0: Used as it is. (When no O.lp pulse coder is used.)
1: Used after being divided by 1/10. (When O.lp pulse coder is
used.)

- 55
APPENDIX 6

AMRO - AMR4:

AMR Applicable motor poles


4 3 2 1 0 No. of pulses/pulse coder rotation
0 0 0 0 1 4 poles, 6000P

0 0 0 1 0 8 poles, 6000P

0 0 I 0 1 6 poles, 6000P

0 0 1 1 0 6 poles, 4000P

0 1 0 0 1 4 poles, 5000P

0 1 0 1 0 6 poles, 5000P

0 1 0 1 1 8 poles, 5000P
1 0 0 0 0 6 poles, 3000P
8 poles, 4000P
1 0 0 0 1 8 poles, 3000P

1 0 1 0 1 6 poles, 2000P

1 1 0 0 0 6 poles, 2500P

1 I 0 1 0 8 poles, 2500P

1 1 1 1 1 8 poles, 2000P

Data number Data

1807 VFSEL PSSEL

#7 #6 #5 H #3 in in no
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
PSSEL: The feedback pulse to the position counter is selected.
0: The pulse generated by the built-in type pulse coder is
multiplied four times and input.
1: The pulse generated by the separate type detector is multiplied
four times and input.
VFSEL: The input pulse to the velocity feedback register is selected.
0: The pulse generated by the built-in pulse coder is multiplied 4
times and input.
1: The pulse generated by the separate type detector is multiplied 4
times and input.

Data number Data

1808

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 in HI #0

t?
- 56
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1809

#7 //6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Parameter input
Data format: Bit axis type
Digital servo related setting data
Note) In this parameter, when PRM1804 #1 (DGPRM) = 0, the standard value is
automatically set with power ON. Normally, no change is required.

Data number Data

1810 NAD Note) CSL CP2 CPI CDS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 n #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
CDS To check whether the resolver or inductosyn position transducer
system is normal, feedback pulse frequency is
0: Checked
1: Not checked
Normally, set 0.
CPI, CP2 Backlash and pitch error compensation rate
CP2 CPI Compensation rate
0 0 32Kpps
0 1 64Kpps
1 0 128Kpps
1 1 256Kpps
Normally, set to 256Kpps.
(Note) This parameter is not used in case of digital servo.
CSL When power is turned on, position control LSI is
0: Checked
1: Not checked
Normally, set 0.
NAD Analog to digital conversion of spindle motor or servo motor current
is (Not used in 11TT)
0: Done
1: Not done

Note) Set "1" to bit 5 without fail.

Data number Data

APCx APZx OPTx RESx

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
RESx Position transducer method is
0: Digital feedback method
1: Analog feedback method
If position is detected by pulse as in pulse coder, specify digital
feedback method. If a resolver or inductosyn is used, specify
analog feedback method.

- 57
APPENDIX 6

OPTx: The position detector includes:


0: For analog servo, a built-in optical scale is not used.
For digital servo, a separate type pulse coder is not used.
1: For analog servo, a built-in optical scale is used.
For digital servo, a separate type pulse coder is used.
APZx When an absolute position detector (absolute pulse code) is used as a
position detector, the relative positioning of machine position and
absolute pulse coder is:
0: Not completed
1 : Completed
If an absolute position detector is used, be sure to set this
parameter to 0 when primary field adjustment is done or when the
absolute pulse coder is replaced. And after turning power ON again,
return to the manual reference point. This completes the relative
positioning of the machine positon and absolute pulse coder, and this
parameter is set automatically to 1.
APCx: 0: Position detector is other than the absolute pulse coder.
1: An absolute pulse coder is used as a position detector.

Data number Data

1816 DM3x DM2x DM1x RC4x RC3x RC2x RClx

#7 #6 #5 #3 #2 //1 #0
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit axis type
RClx to RC4x Reference counter capacity

Reference counter capacity


Digital servo
RC4x RC3x RC2x RClx Analog
Other than 0.1y High resolution
servo
detector detector

0 0 0 0 1000 10000
0 0 0 1 2000 2000 20000
0 0 1 0 3000 3000 30000
0 0 1 1 4000 4000 40000
0 1 0 0 5000 5000 50000
0 1 0 1 6000 6000 60000
0 1 1 0 7000 70000
0 1 1 1 8000 8000 80000
1 0 0 0 9000 90000
1 0 0 1 10000 10000 100000
1 0 1 0 11000 110000
1 0 1 1 12000 120000
1 1 0 0 13000 130000
1 1 0 1 14000 140000
1 1 1 0 15000 150000
1 1 1 1 16000 160000

- 58 -
APPENDIX 6

DM1x to DM3x Detecting multiplier setting

Detecting multiplier
DM3x DM2x DM1x Resolver Pulse coder
Induetsyn Analog servo Digital servo

0 0 0 1/8 1/2 1/2


0 0 1 1/4 1 1
0 1 0 1/4 1 3/2
0 1 1 1/2 2 2
1 0 0 3/8 3/2 5/2
1 0 1 3/4 3 3
1 1 0 1/2 2 7/2
1 1 1 1 4 4

Set this parameter as follows for the spindle positioning (indexing) axis:
Reference counter capacity RC4x ^ RClx: 1001
Detect multiply ratio DM3x ^ DMlz: 111
1) Pulse coder
Move distance per Detect multipling
Capac-
revolution of motor Counting Command ratio(DMR)
ity of
(pulse coder) unit multipling Pulse Pulse Pulse
refer­
Metric Inch (pm or ratio coder coder coder
Rotary ence
feed feed 10 ** inch) (CMR) 2000 2500 3000
axis counter
screw screw ppr ppr ppr
12 mm 12° 1.2inch 1 1 4 6000

10 mm 10° 1.Oinch 1 1 4 10000

8 mm 8° 0.8inch 1 1 4 8000

6 mm 6° 0.6inch 1 1 3 2 6000

5 mm 5° 0.5inch 1 1 2 5000

4 mm 4° 0.4inch 1 1 2 4000

3 mm 3° 0.3inch 1 1 1.5 1 2000

2.5 mm 2.5° 0.25inch 0.5 2 2 5000

2 mm 2° 0.2inch 1 1 1 2000

1.5 mm 1.5° 0.15inch 0.5 2 1 3000

1 mm 1° 0.linch 0.5 2 1 2000

Note 1) The data in the above table is standard. The command and detect
multiply ratio can be changed; but, in that case, there is a limit for
maximum feed rate.

- 59
APPENDIX 6

2) Resolver/Inductosyn (Metric, Inch system ball screw)

Moving dis­
tance per Capacity of
Detection unit Command Multi­ Detect multi­
reference
revolution of (pm) ply ratio(CMR) ply ratio(DMR)
detector counter

2 mm 1 1 0.5 2000

0.2 inch 1 1 0.5 2000

3) Multipole resolver
Metric system ball screw
Moving
distance Detecting Capacity of Loop gain multiplier
Kind of
per 1 CMR DMR unit reference
resolver
revolution (pm) counter
7V/2000rpm 7V/1000rpm
of motor
10 mm 5X 1 1/2 1 2000 717 1434

8 mm 4X 1 1/2 1 2000 896 1792

6 mm 3X 1 1/2 1 2000 1195 2389

5 mm 5X 2 1/2 0.5 2000 717 1434

4 mm 4X 2 1/2 0.5 2000 896 1792

3 mm 3X 2 1/2 0.5 2000 1195 2389

Inch system ball screw


Moving
Detecting
distance Capacity of Loop gain multiplier
Kind of unit .
per 1 CMR DMR reference
resolver (xlO"4
revolution counter
inch) 7V/2000rpm 7V/1000rpm
of motor
0.5 inch 5X 2 1/2 0.5 2000 717 1434

0.4 inch 4X 2 1/2 0.5 2000 896 1792

0.3 inch 3X 2 1/2 0.5 2000 1195 2389

- 60 -

J
APPENDIX 6

4) In case of pulse coder (with digital servo)

Move distance per Increment Command Detection


revolution of motor system multi­ multiply ratio Reference
(pulse coder) (Detection ply (DMR) counter
Feed screw Rotary Feed screw unit) ratio Pulse coder capacity
is metric axis is inch (pm or (CMR) 2000 2500 3000
(mm) (deg) (inch) PPR PPR PPR
10 ^ inch)

12 12 1.2 1 1 „, _ 4 12000
10 10 1.0 1 1 - 4 - 10000
9 9 0.9 1 1 - - 3 9000
8 8 0.8 1 1 4 - - 8000
7 7 0.7 1 1 3.5 - - 7000
6 6 0.6 1 1 3 - 2 6000
5 5 0.5 1 1 2.5 2 - 5000
4 4 0.4 1 1 2 - - 4000
3 3 0.3 1 1 1.5 - 1 3000
2 2 0.2 1 1 1 - - 2000
1 1 0.1 1 1 0.5 — — 1000

5) In case of pulse coder (with digital servo and with high resolution
detector)

Move distance per Increment Command Detection


revolution of motorsystem system multi­ multiply
(pulse coder) (Detection ply ratio Reference
Feed screw Rotary Feed screw unit) ratio (DMR) counter
is metric axis is inch (pm or (CMR) Pulse coder capacity
(mm) (deg) (inch) 20000 25000
10 ^ inch)
PPR PPR

10 10 1.0 0.1 1 _ 4 100000


8 8 0.8 0.1 1 4 - 80000
7 7 0.7 0.1 1 3.5 - 70000
6 6 0.6 0.1 1 3 - 60000
5 5 0.5 0.1 1 2.5 2 50000
4 4 0.4 0.1 1 2 - 40000
3 3 0.3 0.1 1 1.5 - 30000
2 2 0.2 0.1 1 1 - 20000
1 1 0.1 0.1 1 0.5 — 10000

(Note 1) Other combination is also available with the high resolution detector.

Data number Data

1820 Command multiplier of each axis (CMR)

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type
Data unit: 0.5 magnifications
Data range: 1 - 4 0 (0.5 - 20 magnifications)

- 6i
i

L
APPENDIX 6

A command multiplier which indicates the ratio of the least command


increment to detection unit is specified.
The least command increment = Detection unit x Command multiplier
Set 2 (1 time) to this parameter for the spindle positioning (indexing)
axis.
Relationships between increment system and least command increment

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Command multiplier (CMR), detection multiplier (DMR), and reference


counter capacity

to
velocity
control

Adjust the CMR and DMR magnifications so that + input pulse weight is the
same as input pulse weight for the error counter shown in the above
figure.
The least command increment/CMR = Detection unit = Feedback pulse
unit/DMR
The feedback pulse unit varies according to the position transducer type.
Pulse coder:
Feedback pulse unit = Machine movement per pulse coder rotation/
Number of pulses per pulse coder rotation
(2000, 2500, or 3000)
Resolver or inductosyn:
Feedback pulse unit = Machine movement per resolver or
inductosyn one wavelength/4000
Specify grid interval as reference counter capacity for grid method
reference point return.
Reference counter capacity = Grid interval/Detection unit
Pulse coder:
Grid interval = Machine movement per pulse coder rotation
Resolver or inductosyn:
Grid interval = Machine movement per wavelength of resolver or
inductosyn
Setting method of the command multiply ratio per axis by the optional command
multiply function is as follows. (10M/11M)
1) Command multiply ratio = For 1/2 - 1/27
Set the parameter ACMR Data No. 1816, #7 to 1 and set the value given by the
following expression into the parameter CMR Data No. 1820.

Setting value = ___________ 1__________


Command multiply ratio

Data range: 1 to 27

- 62

J
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1827 In-position width of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit. In case the high resolution detector provided
(Data No. 1804, parameter PLC01=1), ten times the detection
unit.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The in-position width is specified for each axis.
If the deviation of the machine position and the command position
(position deviation absolute value) is less than the in-position width, it
is assumed that the machine has reached the command position or is in­
position.

Data number Data

1828 Position deviation limit value while moving for each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit. In case the high resolution detector provided
(Data No. 1804, parameter PLC01=1), ten times the detection
unit.

Data range: 0 - 32767


The position deviation limit value during axis movement is specified for
each axis.
If the position deviation exceeds the position deviation limit value while
moving, a servo alarm occurs and the machine stops immediately. (Same as
emergency stop)
Generally, specify a value larger than the position deviation during rapid
traversing.

Data number Data

1829 Position deviation limit value at stop for each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit. In case high resolution detector provided
(Data No. 1804, parameter PLC01=1), ten times the detection
unit.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The position deviation limit value at stop is specified for each axis.
If the position deviation exceeds the limit value when the axis movement
stops, a servo alarm occurs and the machine stops instantly. (Same as
emergency stop)

- 64 -
APPENDIX 6

2) Command multiply ratio = For 0.5 - 48


Set the parameter ACMR Data No. 1816, #7 to 0 and set the value given by the
following expression into the parameter CMR Data No. 1820.
Setting value = Command multiply ratio * 2
Data range: 1 to 96

Data number Data

1825 Servo loop gain of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: 0.01 1/sec
Data range: 1 - 9999
Position control loop gain is specified for each axis.
For a machine which performs linear or circular interpolation (cutting
process), specify the same value for all of the axes. For a machine which
only requires positioning, different values may be specified for different
axes.
The larger the loop gain, the higher the position control response. If it
is too large, the servo system becomes unstable.
The relationships between the position deviation (amount of pulses stored
in error counter) and the feedrate are expressed as follows:
Position deviation = Feedrate/(60*Loop gain)
Unit: Position deviation mm, inches, or deg
Feedrate mm/min, inches/min, or deg/min
Loop gain sec ^

Data number Data

1826 Loop gain multiplier of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data range: 1 - 32767
Loop gain multiplier is specified for each axis.
Loop gain multiplier is conversion multiplier which converts a position
deviation into the velocity command voltages.
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 x E x A/L
E: The velocity command voltage necessary to rotate the motor at 1000
RPM
E = 7: For 7V 1000 RPM servo motor
E = 3.5: For 7V 2000 RPM servo motor
A: Detection unit (mm, inch or deg)
L: Move distance per motor revolution (mm, inch or deg)
Data unit: msec
Example: The machine movement per motor rotation is 10mm, 7V 1000 RPM
servo motor, and the detection unit is 0.001mm;
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 x 7 x 0.001/10
= 1434
(Note) This parameter is not used with digital servo.

- 63 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1830 Position deviation limit value at servo off for each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit. In case high resolution detector provided
(Data No. 1804, parameter PLC01=1), ten times the detection
unit.
Data range: 0 - 32767
The position deviation limit value at servo off is specified for each
axis.
If the position deviation exceeds the limit value at servo off, a servo
alarm occurs and the machine stops immediately. (Same as emergency stop)
Specify the same value as the position deviation limit value at stop.

Data number Data

1831 Velocity command value lowest clamp value of each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: 1 Velo
Data range: 0-7
Specify the velocity command values lowest clamp value for each axis.
Usually, specify 0.
Velocity command
value (Velo)

Position deviation

Note) 1 Velo is equivalent to 12.5/8192 V of velocity command voltage.


This parameter is not used with digital servo.

Data number Data

1832 Feedstop position deviation of each axix

Parameter entry (F12)


Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit. In case high resolution detector provided
(Data No. 1804, parameter PLC01=1), ten times the detection
unit.

- 65
APPENDIX 6

Data range: 0 - 32767


Specify feedstop position deviation for each axis.
If the position deviation exceeds the feedstop position deviation while
moving, the pulse distribution and the acceleration/deceleration controls
are temporarily stopped. When the position deviation becomes less than
the feedstop position deviation, the pulse distribution and the
acceleration/deceleration controls are restarted.
The feedstop function is used mainly to decrease overshoot when a large
servo motor is accelerated or decelerated.
Specify an intermediate value between the position deviation limit value
while moving and the position deviation at rapid traverse as the feedstop
position deviation.

Data number Data

1833 Position transducer phase shift value of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data range: 0 - 500
If a resolver or inductosyn is used as the position transducer, the data
corresponding to the phase of signal from the position transducer is
automatically specified.
At the first field adjustment, or when the position transducer is
replaced, set 0 t o ,data number 1802 parameter PSFx and turn the power off
and on. Phase shift value is then automatically set.
If a digital feedback position transducer, such as a pulse coder, is used,
this parameter is ignored.

Data number Data

1834 Drift compensation amount of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: 1 Velo
Data range: -500 - +500
Specify the drift compensation amount for each axis when the parameter is
set to not automatically compensate drift (data number 1800 parameter ADR
= 0).
Drift occurring in a servo loop can be compensated.
If the parameter is set to automatically compensate drift (data number
1800 parameter ADR = 1), drift occurring in a servo loop is automatically
compensated for as follows:
If the stop status in which the position deviation is larger than the in­
position width (data number 1827) remains for approximately 2 seconds, the
velocity command voltage equivalent to the position deviation at that time
is added to the drift compensation amount to make the position deviation
0.
If the absolute value of the drift compensation amount exceeds 500 Velo, a
servo alarm occurs.
Velocity command voltage equivalent to position deviation (Velo)
= 0.000000192 x Loop gain (Setting value) x Loop gain multiplier
(Setting value) x Position deviation amount (Detection unit)
This parameter is not used with digital servo.

- 66
A P P E N D I X 6

Data number Data

1850 Grid shift amount of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit. In case high resolution detector provided
(Data No. 1804, parameter PLC01=1), ten times the detection
unit.
Data range: -32768 - +32767
Specify the grid shift amount for each axis.
The grid position can be shifted by the amount specified in the parameter
to move the reference point position. The grid shift amount should be
reference counter capacity (data number 1816 parameter RClx - RC4x) or
less.

Data number Data

1851 Backlash compensation amount for each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit
Data range: -9999 - +9999
Specify the backlash compensation amount for each axis.
After the power is turned on, the first backlash compensation is performed
when an axis moves in the direction opposite to the reference point return
direction.
How to set backlash compensation amount
(PSet the CMR of the adjusting axis at 1 time (setting value is 2).
(To match the leastinput unit and the detection unit.)
Set 2 to the corresponding axis of parameter number 1820.
Note) Remember the value set in parameter number 1820, because after the
backlash amount setting, this value must be reset to the original
value.
(2) Set 0 as the backlash compensation amount of the adjusting axis.
Also, set the compensation amount of parameter number 1851's corres­
ponding axis to 0.
O First, move the machine to the positive direction by manual continu­
ous feed (rapid feed or jogging); then move the machine by some
least input increments in the same direction with step feed or
manual handle feed and stop the machine.
Regard the position where the machine stopped as the reference
position. Move the machine in the least input increment by about 20
increments and measure the stop position of eah least input
increment.
Move the machine in the negative direction in the least input
increment until the machine reaches the reference position. Measure
the stop position of each least input increment. Illustrate these
measurement values as follows:
(See the following figure.)

- 67
APPENDIX 6

Calculate the difference of the command of the plus and minus


directions corresponding to the same machine position around the
center of the move from these stop positions; set these values as
backlash compensation amounts to the corresponding axis of parameter
number 1851.
Note 1) It can also be started from the move of the minus direction.
Note 2) When measuring a single axis, set the other move sections at the
center or any other stable position.
(4) After repeating the measuring and setting of 3 and ending the
setting of the backlashes of all axes, reset the value of parameter
number 1820 to the original value.

Data number Data

1852^1873 Digital servo related parameter

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:
Data range:
Digital servo related parameter
Note) In this parameter, when PRM1804 #1 (DGPRM) = 0, the standard value
is set automatically with power ON. Normally, no change is
required.

Data number Data

1874 Type No. of motor for each axis

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:
Data range: 1 to 32767
NC memory has a digital servo related parameter standard value for each type
of motor, but in this parameter setting, it is possible to select data to
be applied. A parameter is set for each axis. When this parameter is less
than 0, or if a type of motor which is not registered is set, an alarm
(SV027) occurs.

- 68
APPENDIX 6

Motor type Setting value

5-0 3
4-0 4
3-0 5
2-0 6
1-0 7
0 8
5 9
10 10
20M 11
20 12
30 13
30R 14

Data number Data

1875 Load to inertia rate for each axis

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:
Data range: 0 to 32767
When a digital servo is used, calculate the load of the motor rotor inertia
ratio according to the following equation and set it for each axis.
Load inertia
Load inertia ratio x 256
Rotor inertia
Data number Data
Pulses per motor rotation of detector for each axis
1876
(PULCO)____________________________________________
Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: PULSE/REV
Data range: 1 to 32767
When a digital servo is used, set the number of pulses per motor rotation of
detector used for velocity feedback for each axis. For this calculation,
assume that the number of pulses is 4 for one pulse cycle of phases A and B.
However, when a O.ly pulse coder is used, set 1/10 data.
When this parameter is less than 0, the alarm (SV027) occurs.

Data number Data

1877^1878 Digital servo related parameter

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:
Data range:
Digital servo related parameter
Note) In this parameter, when PRM1804 #1 (DGPRM) = 0, the standard value
is set automatically with power ON. Normally, no change is
required.

- 69
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

1879 Motor rotating direction for each axis

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
See the motor rotating direction.
Ill: Positive direction (the motor is rotated counterclockwise by "+"
command, as viewed from the motor shaft side).
-Ill: Negative direction (the motor is rotated clockwise by "+" command,
as viewed from the motor shaft side).
If other than the above value is set, the alarm (SV027) occurs.

Data number Data


No. of pulses per motor rotatin of detector for each
1891
axis (PPLS)___________________________________________
Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: PULSE/REV
Data range: 1 to 32767
When a digital servo is used, set the number of pulses per motor rotation of
detector used for position feedback for each axis. For this calculation
assume that the No. of pulses is 4 in one pulse cycle of phases A and B.
However, when a O.lp pulse coder is used, set 1/10 data.
When this parameter is less than 0, the alarm (SV027) occurs.

Data number Data

1892 Digital servo related parameter

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit:
Data range:
Digital servo related parameter
Note) In this parameter, when PRM1804 #1 (DGPRM) = 0, the standard value
will be set automatically when power is turned ON. Normally, no
change is required.

Data number Data

1890 Feedback pulse check move distance of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detection unit
Data range: -255 - +255
If a digital feedback transducer (such as a pulse coder) is used, the
servo motor is rotated based on the data specified here at power on, and
feedback is checked regardless if the feedback pulse is generated
correctly.
If 0 is set in this parameter, it is not checked. If 20 to 30 or a
similar value is set, it will be checked.

70
APPENDIX 6

4.8 Parameters Related to DI/DO

Data number Data

2000 DCS OPS STR STJ RWM RSD

iil H #5 #4 #3 n iil #0 (Bit)


Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
RSD Resetting signal (RST) is
0: Always output when reset status is effected
1: Output only when reset is effected by the MDI panel reset button
RWM Rewinding signal (RWD) is
0: Only output if the tape is being rewound on the. tape reader by
the reset & rewind signal
1: Output if the tape is being rewound on the tape reader by the
reset & rewind signal or a program stored in the memory is being
rewound
STJ Cycle start lamp signal (STL)
0: Is not output during operation by manual numeric value commands
1: Is output during operation by manual numeric value commands
STR When programs are loaded by the cycle start signal in the part
program edit mode (data number 2200, parameter RDS), the cycle start
lamp signal is
0: Not output
1: Output
OPS When searching for a sequence number, the cycle operating signal
(OP) is
0: Not turned on
1: Turned on
DCS MDI mode operation can
0: Not be activated by the MDI panel start button
(Can be activated by external cycle start signal)
1: Be activated by the MDI panel start button

Data number Data

2001 EF 6MI MIC POV MPN MOC ENR

#7 Ü6 #5 #4 ii 3 Ü2 H ii 0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
ENR At emergency stop
0: Reset is in effect
1: Reset is not in effect but an alarm is indicated. Emergency
stop is released if the reset is in effect
MOC If all of the mode select signals are turned off,
0: No mode is assumed
1: The previously selected mode is assumed
MPN Incremental feed quantity is (For Basic Machine Interface (BMI))
0: Not specified by manual handle feed magnification specification
signals MP1, MP2, and MP3 (Directly specify the feed amount by
32 bits)
1: Specified by manual handle feed magnification specification
signals MP1, MP2, and MP3

71
A P P E N D I X 6

POV Override signals OV1 - OV8, ROV1, ROV2 are (for 10 series)
0: Standard interface
1: Logical 0/1 reverse interface
Effective with FS3 interface.
MIC Machine interface selection
0: Basic machine interface
1: (1?S^ or FS6 interface
^ For F10, the FS3 or FS6 interface can be selected by parameter
\ 6MI. For FS11, the FS6 interface can be selected.
6MI Selects the FS3 or FS6 interface (For 10 series)
0: \J’S3 interface
1: FS6 interface
EF External operation command signal EF (for F10M) is
0: Not output
1: Output to ZPZ (Z axis reference point return completion signal)
position
This parameter is only valid for lOMs which select the FS3 inter­
face.

Data number Data

2002 NGA J+H

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #0 (I

J+H 0:
Manual handle feed is effective only when the manual handle feed
mode is selected; it is not effective when the manual continuous
feed (manual jog feed) or manual step feed mode is selected.
1: Manual handle feed is effective when the manual continuous feed
(manual jog feed) or manual step feed mode is selected.
This parameter is effective only for 10 series with 3 interface.
NGA With G10.1 command (Not used in 11TT)
0: Time out of answer from PMC is checked
1: Time out of answer from PMC is not checked
Parameter NGA is used to debug the PMC program.

Data number Data

2003 MHD HAB UHS BSN TSN SSN MSN

#7 //6 #5 #4 #3 #2 in #0 (Bit)
Parameter input
Data format: Bit type
MSN Minus
0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
in M codes.
SSN Minus
0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
in S codes.
TSN Minus
0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
in T codes.

72
APPENDIX 6

BSN Minus
0: Cannot be used
1: Can be used
in the second auxiliary function.
Parameters MSN, SSN, TSN and BSN are those effective when BMI interface is
used.
UHS When multi-handle A specification or B specification is selected,
the handle axis selecting signals are:
0: Used
1: Not used (only the selection of manual handle feed mode allows
handle feeding on all axes)
HAB 0: C specification
1: A or B specification (also refer to parameter 7701)
(HAB is effective only when is 0.)
MHD The multi-handle in FS6M interface is:
0: A, B or C specification
1: D specification
UHS, HAB and MHD are effective only for 10M/11M with FS6 interface.

Data number Data

2010 Strobe signal MF, SF, TF, or BF delay time

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 32767
The time delay between M, S, T, or B code transmission and strobe signals
MF, SF, TF, or BF, signal transmission is specified.

M, S, T, or B code

MF, SF, TF, or BF signal

Delay

Data number Data

2011 M, S, T, or B function completion signal (FIN)


acceptance width

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 32767
The minimum signal width in which the M, S, T, or B function completion
signal (FIN) is assumed to be valid, is specified.

73
APPENDIX 6

M, S, T, or B code

MF, SF, TF, or BF signal

FIN signal

Ignored because Valid because it is


it is narrower wider than minimum
signal width signal width

Data number Data

2014 Mode unselected status ignore time

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 32767
If the parameter (data number 2001, parameter MOC = 0) is specified to
ignore the mode selection when all of the mode select signals are turned
off, the previous mode can be maintained during the mode unselected status
ignored time.
Normally, specify the time necessary to ignore the mode signal chatter.

Data number Data

2015 Invalid mode selected status ignore time

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: 1 msec
Data range: 0 - 32767
If an invalid combination of mode signals is entered, the previous mode is
maintained during the invalid mode selected status ignored time. The
status is then put into the mode unselected status.
Specify the time necessary to ignore mode signal chattering.

Data number Data

2016 Manual feedrate override clamp value

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit: 0.01%
Data range: 0 - 65535
If an override value larger than the manual feedrate override clamp value
is entered, this value is used to clamp. This parameter is only valid if
the basic machine interface (BMI) is used.
When FS3 or FS6 interface is used, set this parameter to 65535.

- 74
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2020 Software operator panel positive (+) direction


command button

Parameter entry (For F10)


Data format: Byte axis type
Data unit: Integer
Data range: 0-9
Specify the MDI panel numeric value key number which instructs the manual
feed positive (+) direction on the software operator panel. If 0 is
specified, no MDI panel numeric value key instruction in the positive (+)
direction is assumed. This parameter is effective in case small CRT/MDI
panel is used with 10 series.
Example:
1st axis (X)positive (+) direction: Numeric value key 6
2nd axis (Y)positive (+) direction: Numeric value key 9
3rd axis (Z)positive (+) direction: Numeric value key 8

Data number Data

2021 Software operator panel minus (-) direction command


button

Parameter entry (For F10)


Data format: Byte axis type
Data unit: Integer
Data range: 0-9
Specify the MDI panel numeric value key number which instructs the manual
feed minus (-) direction on the software operator panel. If 0 is speci­
fied, no MDI panel numeric value key instruction in the minus (-) direc­
tion is assumed. This parameter is effective in case small CRT/MDI unit
is used with 10 series.
Example :
1st axis (X) minus (-) direction: Numeric value key 4
2nd axis (Y) minus (-) direction: Numeric value key 1
3rd axis (Z) minus (-) direction: Numeric value key 2

Data number Data

2030 Allowable digits in M code

2031 Allowable digits in S code

2032 Allowable digits in T code

2033 Allowable digits in the second auxiliary function

Parameter input (Valid only with BMI interface)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: Integer
Data range: 1-8
See the allowable digits in the M, S, T, B codes.

- 75
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2049 How to perform external work number search

Parameter input
Data format: Byte type
Data range: -127 - +127
Descriptions
0 to 99: Search is done by making the number the higher two digits of the
program number (the lower two digits are the value of an input
signal for work number search).
Less than 0 (minus), or more than 100:
Ascending order search is done by making the value specified
with an input signal for work number search, the lower two
digits of the program number (the upper two digits are
optional).
Note) The value of the parameter is still in decimal notation. The value of
DI, WN ,
are input in binary input and
Example 1) 2049 10
WN16 WN8 WN4 WN2 WN1 Search 1006
0 0 1 1 0
Example 2) 2049 -1
Search ??06 in
WN16 WN8 WN4 WN2 WN1
ascending order.
0 0 1 1 0

- 76
APPENDIX 6

4.9 Parameters Related to CRT/M DI and ED IT

Data number Data

2200 RDS PAL NM9 NPE RAL REP RDL

#7 //6 //5 //4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)


Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
RDL When programs are loaded by foreground editing (included external
I/O control)
0: Previously loaded programs are deleted and programs are loaded
Note) Programs which cannot be edited are not deleted.
1: Programs are loaded without deleting the previously loaded
programs
REP If the program with the same program number as the already-loaded
program is loaded
0: An alarm is indicated
1: The already loaded program is deleted first, then the attempted
program is loaded
Note) Programs which cannot be edited are not deleted; but, an
alarm is indicated.
RAL When registering the program with external I/O devices control (both
in foreground and in background edition), or with cycle start
signal,
0: A single program is registered.
1: All programs are registered.
NPE When programs are loaded, M02, M30, and M99 should
0: Be assumed as program end
1: Not be assumed as program end
In this case a program number must exist in the first block of
the program.
NM9 When programs are loaded, M99 is
0: Assumed as the program end
1: Not assumed as the program end
This parameter is only valid if parameter NPE = 0.
In case of program registration, if it is required to assume M02 or
M30 as a program end but not M99, set NPE = 0 and NM9 = 1.
PAL When punching the program with external I/O device control
(foreground editing only),
0: Punch a single program
1: Punch all programs
RDS The register of programs by a cycle start signal under part program
editing mode is,
0: Invalid >
1: Valid
Used to register programs externally such as from PMC and other
devices.

- 77
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

NC0 SB9 ND9 NE 9

#7 //6 #5 //4 #3 #2 #1 //0 (Bit)


Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
NE9 Programs 09000 - 09999 can
0: Be edited I
1: Not be edited
ND9 Programs 09000 - 09999 are
0: Displayed during execution
1: Not displayed during execution
Specify 1 if programs such as custom macro programs need not be
displayed during execution.
SB9 In the macro statements of programs 09000 - 09999,
0: Single block stop is not performed
I: Single block stop is performed
Specify 1 if it is necessary to debug programs 09000 - 09999.
NC0 After the background editing,
0: Perform
1: Do not perform memory arrangement of the selected program.

Data number Data

2202 DVM DSM DEV DES DCR DTL DSE D10

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 n #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
D10 The external position display and the CRT position (except machine
position display) are displayed
0: In standard unit
1: In 10 magnifications of standard unit
DSE In the external position display and relative position display on
the CRT
0: Coordinate preset is not done
1: Coordinate preset is done
Here, the meaning of "coordinate preset is done" by setting value
being 1 is as follows:
When the absolute position display is preset by the following
operations, the relative position display is preset to the same
value as absolute position display.
(i) Manual reference point return
(ii) Coordinate setting by G92 (G50 in case of G code system A in
case of lathe system)

- 78
APPENDIX 6

DTL In case of 10M/11M/12M, the external position display, CRT relative


position display and the absolute position display
0: are the values without excluding the move distance by tool
length compensation
1: are the values with excluding the move distance by tool length
compensation (programmed command position)
In case of 10T/11T/11TT/12T, the external position display and CRT
relative position display
0: are the values without excluding the move distance by tool
offset
‘1: are the values with excluding the move distance by tool offset
(program command position)
For absolute position display, refer to Data No. 2203, DTA.
DCR In case of 10M/11M/12M, the external position display, CRT relative
position display and absolute position display
0: are the values without excluding the move distance by cutter
compensation
1: are the values with excluding the move distance by cutter
compensation (program command position)
In case of 10T/11T/11TT/12T, the external position display and CRT
relative position display
0: are the values without excluding the move distance by tool nose
radius compensation
1: are the values with excluding the move distance by tool nose
radius compensation
For absolute position display, refer to Data No. 2203, DTA
DES The external position display, CRT relative position, and absolute
position are displayed
0: Without considering the delay due to the acceleration/
deceleration control
1: Considering the delay due to the acceleration/deceleration
control
DEV The external position display, CRT relative position, and absolute
position are displayed
0: Without considering the delay (position deviation) due to the
servo
1: With considering the delay (position deviation) due to the servo
DSM The CRT machine position is displayed
0: Without considering the delay due to the acceleration/
deceleration control
1: Considering the delay due to the acceleration/deceleration
control
DVM The CRT machine position is displayed
0: Without considering the delay (position deviation) due to the
servo
1: With considering the delay (position deviation) due to the servo

- 79
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2203 NNO DH2 TLN DTA DAP MCN

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
MCN The machine position on CRT is displayed
0: In the transducer system unit, regardless of metric or inch
entry
1: In metric if entered in metric, or in inches if entered in
inches
DAP The present position display on the program check screen is:
0: Incremental position
1: Absolute position
DTA (10T/11T/11TT/I2T)
The absolute position display
0: is the value with excluding the move value by the tool offset
and the tool nose radius compensation (program command position)
1: is the value without excluding the move value by the tool offset
and the tool nose radius compensation
DH2 (In case of 11TT)
On the present position display, the sequence of the present
position display is
0: in the order of controlled axes of the 1st tool post and
controlled axes of the 2nd tool post
1: in the order of controlled axes of the 2nd tool post and
controlled axes of the 1st tool post
(Example)
DH2 = 0 DH2 = 1
1.234 3.456
X1 X2
2.345 z2 4.567
Z1
3.456 1.234
X2 *1
4.567 2.345
Z2
TLN T codes
des displayed on the program check screen and T code that can be
read by system variables of custom macro with the function of "Tool
Offset by Tool Number"
0: are pot numbers
1: are tool numbers
NNO In the external operator message display,
0: Change line
1: Do not change line for different number messages.

80 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2204 NOS

#7 #6 #5 //4 #3 #2 in #0
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
NOS The actual spindle speed on the CRT
0: is displayed
1: is not displayed
The actual spindle speed is displayed on the CRT according to the feedback
of the position coder attached to the spindle.
Set this parameter to 1 for the machine tool which is not equipped with
the position coder because such machine is not required the thread cutting
function and per revolution feed function.

Data number Data

2210 Password (PSW)

Parameter entry
Data format: 2 word type
Data range: 0 - 99999999
Set a password.
If other value than 0 is preset here, the program is placed in locked
conditions. The display becomes blank, thus the part program editing
operation becomes the locked condition. This parameter can be set when
(password) = 0 or (password) = (key).

Data number Data

2211 Key (KEY)

Parameter entry
Data format: 2 word type
Data range: 0 - 99999999
If the same value as a password is set here, the key is placed in unlocked
conditions. The preset value is not displayed.

Data number Data

2212 Program protection range: Minimum value (PMIN)

2213 Program protection range: Maximum value (PMAX)

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data range: 0 - 9999
Programs with the numbers within the range preset here are placed in
locked conditions. Preset the respective maximum and minimum values of
Program No. within the range for setting.
(Example) PRM2212 = 7000, and PRM2213 = 8499, 07000 to 08499 programs are
placed in locked conditions.

- 81
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2291 Program number commonly used for 1st and 2nd tool post

Setting entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data range: 1 - 9999
The programs with program number more than the value set to this parameter
are commonly used for 1st and 2nd tool post.
(Example) When the set value is 7000,
(i) Program number 1 to 6999
The programs with odd program number among then is used for 1st tool
post, and the programs with even program number among them is used
for 2nd tool post.
(ii) Program number 7000 to 9999
The programs with these program number are commonly used for 1st and
2nd tool post.

Data number Data

2311 Name of general purpose switches on software


operator's panel

s
2388 Name of general purpose switches on software
operator's panel

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: -128^ +127
The names of general purpose switches (SIGNAL 1 - SIGNAL 8) on the
software operator's panel in the following figure are set as follows.

OPERATOR'S PANEL 01234 N5678

SIGNAL 1 1OFF ON
SIGNAL 2 OFF 0Ñ1
SIGNAL 3 OFF 0Ñ1
SIGNAL 4 íof FI ON
SIGNAL 5 1OFF 1 ON
SIGNAL 6 Io ffJ ON
SIGNAL 7 R iff] ON
SIGNAL 8 OFF m
ACTUAL POSITION (ABSOLUTE)
X 123.456 Z -456.789

AUTO

- 82
APPENDIX 6

Parameter No. Parameter


Parameters No 2311 to No. 2388 set the characters to be displayed by codes:
PRM. No. 2311 Code (083) corresponding to character "S" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2312 Code (073) corresponding to character "I" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2313 Code (071) corresponding to character "G" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2314 Code (078) corresponding to character "N" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2315 Code (065) corresponding to character "A" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2316 Code (076) corresponding to character "L" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2317 Code (032) corresponding to character " " of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2318 Code (048) corresponding to character "1" of SIGNAL 1 in the
above figure is set.
PRM. No. 2321 - 2328 Codes for SIGNAL 2 in the above figure are set.
PRM. No. 2331 - 2338 Codes for SIGNAL 3 in the above figure are set.
PRM. No. 2341 - 2348 Codes for SIGNAL 4 in the above figure are set.
PRM. No. 2351 - 2358 Codes for SIGNAL 5 in the above figure are set.
PRM. No. 2361 - 2368 Codes for SIGNAL 6 in the above figure are set.
PRM. No. 2371 - 2378 Codes for SIGNAL 7 in the above figure are set.
PRM. No. 2381 - 2388 Codes for SIGNAL 8 in the above figure are set.
For character codes, refer to the characters-to-codes table in the next page.

- 83 -
APPENDIX 6

Character-to-codes Correspondence Table

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment

A 065 6 054

B 066 7 055

C 067 8 056

D 068 9 057

E 069 032 Space

F 070 1
• 033 Exclamation mark
It
G 071 034 Quotation mark

H 072 # 035 Sharp

I 073 $ 036 Dollar symbol

J 074 % 037 Percent

K 075 & 038 Ampersand


f
L 076 039 Apostrophe

M 077 ( 040 Left parenthesis

N 078 ) 041 Right parenthesis

0 079 * 042 Asterisk

P 080 + 043 Plus sign

Q 081 > 044 Comma

R 082 - 045 Minus sign

S 083 • 046 Period

T 084 / 047 Slash

U 085 • 058 Colon

V 086 •
> 059 Semi-colon

w 087 < 060 Left angle bracket

X 088 = 061 Sign of equality

Y 089 > 062 Right angle bracket

- 84
APPENDIX 6

Character Code Comment Character Code Comment

Z 090 ? 063 Question mark

0 048 @ 064 Commercial at mark

1 049 r 091 Left square bracket

2 050 A 094

3 051 ¥ 092 Yen symbol

4 052 r 093 Right square bracket

5 053 _ 095 Underline

000 Space

4.10 Parameters Related to Programs

Data number Data

2400 GSC GSB DWL M30 G70 F41 DPI

in #6 //5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
DPI The decimal point is entered by
0: Conventional methods
1: Calculator methods
F41 If the feed per minute (G94 mode) F code is entered in metric
without a decimal point, the unit is
0: 1 mm/min
1: 0.1 mm/min
If it is entered with a decimal point, the decimal point position is
always mm/min.
G70 Inch entry and metric entry are specified (For 10M, 11M, and 12M)
0: G20 (inch entry) and G21 (metric entry)
I: G70 (inch entry) and G71 (metric entry)
M30 If M30 is instructed in the memory operation;
0: Only M30 is sent to the machine, and the program head is located
by the reset & rewind signal (RRW)
1: M30 is sent to the machine, and the program head is located
automatically. Therefore, without reset or reset & rewind, the
program is reexecuted from the beginning when completion signal
FIN for M30 is returned.
Refer to data No. 2403, M02 for M02.
DWL Dwell (G04) is
0: Always dwell in second
1: Dwell in second in case of feed per minute mode (G94) or dwell
in revolution in case of feed per revolution mode (G95)

- 85
APPENDIX 6

GSB, GSC Selection of G code system used in FANUC 10T, HT, 11TT and 12T

GSC GSB G code sélection

0 0 G code System A
0 1 G code System B
1 0 G code System C

Data number Data

NCM MBF G18 G95 G44 G43 G90 G01

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 it 0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
G01 Mode at power turn on and in clear status
0: GOO mode (Positioning)
1: G01 mode (Linear interpolation)
Note) If the NC is reset by the reset button, or by external reset,
either the reset status or the clear status can be selected by
another parameter.
G90 Mode at power turn on and in clear status (For F10M, 11M, and 12M)
0: G9I mode (Incremental command)
1: G90 mode (Absolute command)
In case of G code system A of 10T/11T/11TT/12T, this parameter is
ineffective, and a programmed address selects whether incremental or
absolute.
G43, G44 Specifying G43, G44, or G49 mode at power on or clear status
(or FIOM, 11M, 12M)

G44 G43 G43, G44, G49 mode

0 0 G49 mode
0 1 G43 mode
1 0 G44 mode

G95 Mode at power on and in clear status


0: G94 mode (Feed per minute)
1: G95 mode (Feed per revolution)
G18 Mode at power on and in clear status
0: G17 mode
1: G18 mode
For 10T, 1IT and 12T, the G18 mode is entered when the power is
turned on, or when the system is cleared regardless of this
parameter.
MBF Controls the multi-buffer mode on and off at power on and in the
cleared status.
0: Multi-buffer mode off
1: Multi-buffer mode on
NCM By reset
0: Clear
1: Do not clear
the next modal information.
GOO - G03, G17 - G19, G54 - G59, G93 - G95, G96, G97, G90 - G91,
G43 - G49, F codes, H codes, S codes and T codes.

- 86 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2402 SLE SMX ZNP INC PAI

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 ifl #0 (Bit)
Paramenter entry
Data format: Bit type
PAI 0: Restore
1: Do not restore
coordinate value differences by parallel axes PARKING in incre­
mental specification. (Not used in 11TT)
INC After manual intervention by the manual absolute on, INC specifies
whether the travel command path for absolute (G90) and for incre­
mental (G91) are the same
0: Same (Path for absolute)
1: Different (FANUC 6 type)
ZNP When manual reference point return is completed, work coordinate
values of all axes are
0: Preset only under the reset condition (OP signal is OFF)
1: Alway preset
SMX S code command with G92 (G50 in case of G code system A of lathe) in
same block is
0: Considered as maximum spindle speed setting
1: Not considered as maximum spindle speed setting (considered as
spindle speed command)
SLE Specification of E code (For 10T/11T/11TT/12T)
0: Specifies the number of ridges per inch of inch screw with on E
code.
I: Specifies the thread lead with and E code.

Data number Data

2403 NZN M0 2

if 7 #6... #5 #4 #3 #2 ifl #0
M02 When M02 is transmitted during memory operation
0: M02 is only sent out to the machine side, and reset/rewind
signal (RRW) is used for program heading.
1: M02 is sent out to the machine side, and a program heading is
automatically executed. Consequently, when completion signal
FIN for M02 is returned without any reset or reset and rewind,
the program can be started from its head.
MZN 0: In accordance with data No. 1005 PLZx or data No. 2402 ZNP, the
coordinate system is preset or not by the manual reference point
return.
1: In all axes, no coordinate system is preset by manual reference
point return.
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

2410 Arc radius error limit value

Setting entry
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric entry 0.01 0.001 mm/min


Inch entry 0.001 0.0001 inch/min

Data range: 0 - 99999999


Specify a limit value as the difference between start point radius and end
point radius for circular interpolation command.

Data number Data

2411 M code 1 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register

2412 M code 2 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register

2413 M code 3 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register
I

2414 M code 4 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register I
I
I

2415 M code 5 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register

2416 M code 6 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register
I
I

2417 M code 7 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register

2418 M code 8 which does not put the following block in


the buffer register

- 88 -

v
APPENDIX 6

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0 - 127
Specify M codes which do not put the following block in the buffer
register. If there is an M code whose next block should not be put in the
buffer register until the M function processing terminates, this M code
should be specified.
MOO, M01, M02, and M30 are M codes which do not put the following block in
the buffer register even though they are not specified in these
parameters.

Data number Data

2900 Distance between double turrets

Parameter entry (For F10T, 11T and 12T)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit :

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm/min


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch/min

Data range: 0 - 99999999


If the mirror image for the double turrets function is used, specify the
distance between the double turrets.

4.11 Parameters Related to Graphic Display A

Data number Data

4821 Color specification of cutting feed

Parameter entry
Data type: Byte type
Data range: 0^7
Setting data: 0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Violet
6: Light blue 7: White
Color of cutting feed during drawing in machining is specified.

Data number Data

4822 Color specification of rapid traverse

Parameter entry
Data type: Byte type
Data range: 0^7
Setting data: 0: White 1: Red 2: Green 3: Yellow 4: Blue 5: Violet
6: Light blue 7: White
Color of rapid traverse dur8ing drawing in machining is specified.

- 89 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

4823 Specification of drawing plane

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type: Byte type
Data range: 1^9
Setting data: 1: X-Y plane 2: Y-Z plane 3: Z-X plane *4: X-Y-Z, three
dimentional 5: Y-X plane 6: Z-Y plane 7: X-Z plane
*8: X-Z-Y, three dimensional *9: X-Y-Z Bi-plane

Note) Names of axes shown above are the ones that the axes X, Y, and Z are
made as the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd axes of the graphic display axes.
* Three dimensional drawing and bi-plane drawing are not made on T
(Lathe) system.
Setting of number for drawing plane is made.

Data number Data

4831 Initial value of horizontal rotation angle

Parameter entry
Data type: Word type
Data range: -360 ^ +360
Unit: 1 degree
Setting of initial value of horizontal rotation angle in three dimensional
drawing is made. (10M/11M/12M)

Data number Data


Rotation angle of vertical rotary axis on the
_______ horizontal plane______________________________________
Parameter entry
Data type: Word type
Data range: -360 ^ +360
Unit: 1 degree
Rotation angle of vertical rotary axis on the horizontal plane in three
dimentional drawing is set. (10M/11M/12M)

Data number Data

4833 Horizontal rotation angle

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type: Word type
Data range: -360 ^ +360
Unit: 1 degree
Setting of horizontal rotation angle in three dimensional drawing is made.
(10M/11M/12M)

- 90 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

4834 Vertical rotation angle

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type: Word type
Data range: -360 ^ +360
Unit: 1 degree
Setting of vertical rotation angle in three dimensional drawing is made.
(10M/11M/12M)

Data number Data

4835 Magnification rate of graphic display

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type: Word type
Data range: 1 ^ 10000
Unit: 0.01%
Setting of display magnification of the work coordinate system on the
graphic screen is made.

Data number Data

4881 Drawing center value of drawing screen

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type: 2-word axis type
Data range: -99999999 ^ +99999999
Unit :

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Setting of the drawing center value is made for the graphic to be drawn.

Data number Data

4882 Maximum coordinate value of the drawing screen

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type : 2-word axis type
Data range: -99999999 ^ +99999999
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Setting of the maximum coordinate value is made for the graphic to be


drawn.

- 91 -
APPENDIX 6

«
Data number Data

4883 Minimum coordinate value of the drawing screen

Parameter entry (Note 1)


Data type: 2-word axis type
Data range: -99999999 v +99999999
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Setting of the minimum coordinate value is made for the graphic to be


drawn.

Data number Data

7703 Selection of graphic display axis

Data type: Byte axis type


Data range: 0 ^ 3
Setting data:

Setting value Meaning

1 Making the first axis of the graphic display.


2 Making the second axis of the graphic display.
3 Making the third axis of the graphic display.
0 Making no display axis of the graphic display.

Corresponds the graphic display axes, 1st, 2nd, and 3rd to the controlled
axes.
(Note 1) Normally these parameters shall be set on the graphic parameter
screen with graphic display function A.

4.12 Parameters Related to Reader/puncher Interface

Data number Data

5001 Input/output device No. to be connected to CD1 of


CRT/MDI unit

5002 Input/output device No. to be connected to CD1 of


Master PCB of 10 series

5003 Input/output device No. to be connected to CD2 of


option card 1 of 10 series

- 92
APPENDIX 6

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 1 - 6
Specify the Reader‘puncher device No. to be connected to the connector
CD1/CD2.
Set device specifications corresponding to an I/O device number 1 - 6 in
data number 5110 - 5162.

Data number Data

5011 ASR33/43 device No. to be connected to 20 mA current


loop interface

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 1-6
Specify the Reader puncher device No. to be connected to 20 mA current
loop interface.
Set device specifications corresponding to an I/O device number 1 - 6 in
data number 5110 - 5162.

Data number Data

5110 Specifications number of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 1

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 1-8
Specify the specification number of the Reader/puncher device
corresponding to device number 1.
The relationships between specification numbers and I/O devices are as
follows:

Spec. No. Reader puncher device specifications

1 Tape reader with serial interface


5 Portable tape reader
6 PPR
CD FUNUC cassette
8 Floppy cassette

Data number Data

5111 Number of stop bits of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 1

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 1 -
Specify the number of stop bits of the Reader/puncher device corresponding
with device number 1.

- 93 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5112 Baud rate of Reader puncher device corresponding to


device number 1

Setting entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 1 - II
Specify the baud rate of the Reader/puncher device corresponding with
device number 1.
The relationships between specification numbers and Reader/puncher devices
are as follows:

Specified number Baud rate

1 50
2 100
3 110
4 150
5 200
6 300
7 600
8 1200
9 2400
© 4800
11 9600

Data number Data

5120 Specification number of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 2

5121 Number of stop bits of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 2

5122 Baud rate of Reader puncher device corresponding to


device number 2

5130 Specification number of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 3

5131 Number of stop bits of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 3

5132 Baud rate of Reader puncher device corresponding to


device number 3

5140 Specification number of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 4

- 94 -
APPENDIX 6

5141 Number of stop bits of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 4

5142 Baud rate of Reader/puncher device corresponding to


device number 4

5150 Specification number of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 5

5151 Number of stop bits of Reader/puncher device


corresponding to device number 5

5152 Baud rate of Reader puncher device corresponding to


device number 5

5160 Specification number of Reader/puncher device


corresponding to device number 6

5161 Number of stop bits of Reader puncher device


corresponding to device number 6

5162 Baud rate of Reader/puncher device corresponding to


device number 6

Set these parameters the same as those for device number 1.

4.13 Parameters Related to Stroke Limit

Data number Data

5200 PLC OUT

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 iil #0 (Bit)
Setting entry
Data format: Bit type
OUT For stored stroke limit 2 (10M, 11M, and 12M) or stored stroke limit
3 (10T, 11T, 11TT and 12T):
0: The interior is inhibited area
1: The exterior is inhibited area
PLC 0: Perform
1: Do not perform stroke check before moving.
Note) Valid only to systems with stroke check before move option.

- 95
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

0T3x 0T2x

//7 H #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 //0 (Bit)


Setting entry
Data format: Bit axis type
OT2x If stored stroke limit 2 interior is inhibited (OUT = 0) , stored
stroke limit 2 is
0: Not checked for each axis
1: Checked for each axis
Note 1) If stored stroke limit 2 exterior is inhibited (OUT = 1), stored
stroke limit 2 is checked for all of the axes.
Note 2) For 10T, 11T and 12T the stored stroke limit 2 interior is
always inhibited.
0T3x If stored stroke limit 3 interior is inhibited (OUT = 0), stored
stroke limit 3 is
(For S10T, 11T, 11TT and 12T)
0: Not checked for each axis
1: Checked for each axis
Note) If stored stroke limit 3 exterior is inhibited (OUT = 1), stored
stroke limit 3 is checked for all of the axes.

Data number Data

5220 Stored stroke limit 1 positive (+) direction


coordinate value of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: -99999999 - +99999999


Specify stored stroke limit 1 positive (+) direction coordinate value in
the machine coordinate system for each axis.
Data number Data

5221 Stored stroke limit 1 minus (-) direction coordinate


value of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: -99999999 - +99999999

- 96
APPENDIX 6

Specify stored stroke limit 1 minus (-) direction coordinate value in


machine coordinate system for each axis.

Data number Data

5222 Stored stroke limit 2 positive (+) direction


coordinate value of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: -99999999 - +99999999


Specify stored stroke limit 2 positive (+) direction coordinate value in
the machine coordinate system for each axis.

Data number Data

5223 Stored stroke limit 2 minus (-) direction coordinate


value of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format : 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: -99999999 - +99999999


Specify stored stroke limit 2 minus (-) direction coordinate value in the
machine coordinate system for each axis.

Data number Data

5224 Stored stroke limit 3 positive (+) direction


coordinate value of each axis

Parameter entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT and 12T)


Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

- 97
APPENDIX 6

Data range: -99999999 - +99999999


Specify stored stroke limit 3 positive (+) direction coordinate value in
the machine coordinate system for each axis.

Data number Data

5225 Stored stroke limit 3 minus (-) direction coordinate


value of each axis

Parameter entry (10T, HT, 11TT and 12T)


Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: -99999999 - +99999999


Specify stored stroke limit 3 minus (-) direction coordinate value in the
machine coordinate system for each axis.

4.14 Parameters Related to Pitch Error Compensation

Stored pitch error compensation


1. Function
The pitch error can be compensated in detection units for each axis. This
function becomes valid after the reference point return.
2. Specifications
With the position of the reference point return as the reference point of
compensation, compensation values are set to each compensation interval
which is set to each axis.
i) Axes that can be compensated: All axes
ii) Points of compensation
0 - {128 x (Controlled axis)-l} (Total of all axes)
iii) Range of compensation amount
0 - +7 x compensation magnification (detection unit):
per compensation point
0 - 100: compensation magnification
3. Setting
The following parameters must be set.
(1) Pitch error compensation point number of reference point
(per axis) ......................................... Data number 5420
(2) Pitch error compensation point number at the - end
(per axis) ......................................... Data number 5421
(3) Pitch error compensation point number at the + end
(per axis) ......................................... Data number 5422
(4) Magnification of pitch error compensation
(per axis) ......................................... Data number 5423
(5) Interval between pitch error compensation points
(per axis) ......................................... Data number 5424
(6) Move amount per rotation of rotation axis type pitch
error compensation (in case of rotation axis) ...... Data number 5425
(7) Pitch error compensation data ................ .
... Set compensation data corresponding to the number of each pitch
error compensation point. (See Section 1.2.)

- 98
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5420 Pitch error compensation point number for reference


point of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Number
Data range: 0 - 128x (Number of controlled axes)
Specify the pitch error compensation point number corresponding to the
reference point of each axis.
Example : Pitch error mount (absolute value)

c
1J
Reference point

Compensation
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37
point number

Specified
compensation +1 -3 +1 +1 +1 +2 -1 -3
amount

In the above example, specify 33 as the pitch error compensation point


number corresponding to the reference point.

Data number Data

5421 Pitch error compensation point number nearest the


end of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Number
Data range: 0 - 128x (Number of controlled axes)
Specify the pitch error compensation point number nearest the end of
each axis. In the above example, specify 30.
Data number Data

5422 Pitch error compensation point number nearest the "+"


end of each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Number
Data range: 0 - 128x (Number of controlled axes)

- 99 -
APPENDIX 6

Specify the pitch error compensation point number nearest the "+" end of
each axis. In the above example, specify 37.

Data number Data

5423 Pitch error compensation magnification for each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type
Data unit: 1
Data range: 0 - 100
Specify the pitch error compensation magnification for each axis.
When the pitch error compensation magnification is set to 1, the unit of
compensation data becomes equal to the detection unit.

Data number Data

5424 Interval of pitch error compensation points for each


axis

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: 0 - 99999999


The pitch error compensation points are spaced equally. Specify the
interval for each axis.
The minimum interval of the pitch error compensation points is limited to
the following:
Minimum interval of pitch error compensation points
= maximum feed rate/7,500
Unit: mm, inch, deg or mm/min, inch/min, deg/min
Example: When the maximum feed rate is 15,000 mm/min, the minimum inter­
val of the pitch error compensation points is 2mm.

Data number Data

5425 Movement amount per rotation in rotating axis type


pitch error compensation

Parameter entry
Data format: 2-word axis type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

100
APPENDIX 6

Data range: 0 - 99999999


For an axis subjected to rotating axis type pitch error compensation (data
No. 1006, parameter ROP = 1), specify the movement amount/rotation for
each axis. The movement amount/rotation need not be 360°, and it is
possible to specify the period of rotating axis type pitch error compensa­
tion. The movement amount/rotation, interval and number of compensation
points must satisfy the following relation:
Movement amount/rotation
= compensation interval x number of compensation points
Specify the movement amounts/rotation so that the sum thereof is always
zero.

0 deg (Reference point) 360 deg

Compensation
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
point number

Specified
compensation +1 +1 +2 -1 -2 -2 -2 -1 +2 +1 -2 -1 +1 +1 +2
amount

Specify the parameters as follows for the above example.

Data number 5420 5421 5422 5423 5424 5425

Specified value 10 11 25 1 24000 360000

4.15 Parameters Related to Inclination Compensation (1 1M/12M)

1. Outline
Better machining accuracy and extended machine life are possible by
compensating for errors in the detection unit caused by the positions of
mechanical systems such as the pitch error of the feed screw. Compensation
is performed along an approximately straight line produced by the
compensation points set in the parameters and the corresponding compensation
amount.

101
APPENDIX 6

2. Functions
Three approximately straight lines can be made from the four compensation
points set in the parameters and the amount of compensation. Compensation
is performed along these lines at the compensation intervals of the pitch
error compensation points. The amount of inclination compensation is
superposed on the amount of pitch error compensation.

Pitch error compensation points


0 1 2 3 60 61 126 127

1------1------1------1-----\\-----1----- 1— A\----- 1------ !


Machine coordinates of compensation axis

Supposing that the stored pitch error compensation parameters are set.
Q Pitch error compensation point
number nearest the "-" end (Parameter 5421)
(2) Interval between pitch error
compensation points (Parameter 5424)
(D Pitch error compensation number
for reference point (Parameter 5420)
(4) Pitch error compensation number
nearest the "+" end (Parameter 5422)
The parameters for inclination compensation are set as follows.
a. b. c. d Compensation point numbers (Parameters 5461 - 5464)
a. 6. T. e Amount of compensation
at points a, b, c, and d (Parameters 5471 - 5474)
In the above drawing, a, b, c and d have the values 1, 3, 60 and 126
respectively.
In stored pitch error compensation, the amount of compensation is set
individually for each compensation point. In inclination compensation,
however, the amount of compensation is calculated for each compensation
point by setting the amount of compensation for the four representative
points. (For instance, in the above drawing, the amount of compensation at
each of the compensation points between point a and point b is given by
(6 - a) / (b - a).
Notes
(1) The inclination compensation function becomes effective after the
reference point return on the compensation axis.
(2) Be sure to turn off the power to the NC after setting the parameters for
inclination compensation. (When setting the parameters, an alarm
message will appear warning that "POWER MUST BE OFF".)
(3) Set parameters according to the following conditions:
. The amount of compensation at a single compensation point must be in
the range between -128 and 127.
. Set the compensation points so that aSbScSd.
. The compensation points must lie between the negative (-) end and
positive (+) end of the stored pitch error compensation points. All
four points can be set to 0, however, in this case no compensation
will be performed.

102
APPENDIX 6

(4) The stored pitch error compensation option is necessary to use the
optional inclination compensation function. In this case, the number of
compensation points on each axis must be fewer than 128.
(5) This function can also be used on linear and rotating axes.

Data number Data

Compensation point number "a" on each axis

Compensation point number "b" on each axis

Compensation point number "c" on each axis

Compensation point number "d" on each axis

Parameter input
Data format : Word axis type
Data unit : Number
Data range : 0 - 128 x (Number of control axes)
Set compensation points for inclination compensation. The points to be
set are the compensation numbers in the stored pitch error compensation.

Data number Data

5471 Amount of compensation a at compensation point number


a on each axis

5472 Amount of compensation 8 at compensation point number


b on each axis

5473 Amount of compensation T at compensation point number


c on each axis

5474 Amount of compensation e at compensation point number


d on each axis

Parameter input
Data format: Word axis type
Data unit: Detecting unit
Data range: -32768^ + 32767
The amount of compensation is set for each compensation point.

4.16 Parameters Related to Straightness Compensation (11M/12M)

1. General Outline
Deviations in the straightness between different axes on a machine with a
long stroke may adversely effect the machining accuracy. A high degree of
accuracy can be maintained, however, by compensating another axis in the
detection unit with reference to the movement of a specific moving axis so
as to improve straightness. The function that performs such corrections is
called straightness compensation.
APPENDIX 6

2. Outline of Functions
Pitch error compensation points on moving axis
° 1 2 3 60 61 126 127

in 12; (3) (4)

Machine coordinates for moving axis


a b c

Stored pitch error compensation parameters


(1) Pitch error compensation point
number nearest the "-"end (Parameter 5421)
(2) Interval between pitch error
compensation points (Parameter 5424)
(3) Pitch error compensation number
for reference point (Parameter 5420)
(4) Pitch error compensation point
number nearest the "+" end (Parameter 5422)
Straightness compensation parameters
a. b. c. d Movable axis compensation
point number (Parameters 5501 - 5524)
Set using pitch error compensation point number,
a. 6. T. e Amount of compensation
for compensation axis (Parameters 5551 - 5474)
As the moving axis (parameters 5481 - 5483) moves, compensation is applied
to the compensation axis (parameters 5491 - 5493).
Compensation is applied to compensation axis at the pitch error compensation
point of moving axis. (For instance, in the above example, compensation at
compensation point 3 is applied at the location marked with the asterisk.)
The amount of compensation from point a to point b is given as (8 - a ) /
(b-a).
3. Notes
(1) The straightness compensation function becomes effective after the
reference point return on the moving axis and the compensation axis.
(2) Be sure to turn off the power to the NC after setting the parameters for
straightness compensation. (When setting the parameters, an alarm
message will appear warning that "POWER MUST BE OFF".)
(3) Set parameters according to the following conditions:
. The amount of compensation at a single compensation point must be in
the range between -128 and 127.
. Set the compensation points so that aSb^cSd.
. The compensation points must lie between the negative (-) end and
positive (+) end of the stored pitch error compensation points. All
four points can be set to 0, however, in this case no compensation
will be performed.
(4) The stored pitch error compensation option is necessary to use the
optional straightness compensation function. In this case, the number
of compensation points between the negative end compensation point and
the positive end compensation point in the stored pitch error
compensation must be fewer than 128 on a single axis.
(5) Straightness compensation amount is superposed with stored pitch error
compensation amount when issued.

104
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5481 Axis number of moving axis 1

5482 Axis number of moving axis 2

5483 Axis number of moving axis 3

Parameter input
Data format: Byte format
Data unit : Axis number (No compensation when 0)
Data range : Number of controlled axes
Set axis number of moving axis.

Data number Data

5491 Axis number of compensation axis 1 related to moving


axis 1

5492 Axis number of compensation axis 2 related to moving


axis 2

5493 Axis number of compensation axis 3 related to moving


axis 3

Parameter input
Data format: Byte format
Data unit : Axis number (No compensation when 0)
Data range : Number of controlled axes.
Set axis number of moving axis.

Data number Data

5501 Compensation point number a on moving axis 1

5502 Compensation point number b on moving axis 1

5503 Compensation point number c on moving axis 1

5504 Compensation point number d on moving axis 1

5511 Compensation point number a on moving axis 2

5512 Compensation point number b on moving axis 2

5513 Compensation point number c on moving axis 2

105
APPENDIX 6

5514 Compensation point number d on moving axis 2

5521 Compensation point number a on moving axis 3

5522 Compensation point number b on moving axis 3

5523 Compensation point number c on moving axis 3

5524 Compensation point number d on moving axis 3

Parameter input
Data format: Word format
Data unit : Number
Data range : 0 - 128 x Number of controlled axes
* Compensation point number in stored pitch error compensation
Set four compensation points for each moving axis.

Data number Data

5551 Amount of compensation at compensation point "a" on


moving axis 1

5552 Amount of compensation at compensation point "b" on


moving axis 1

5553 Amount of compensation at compensation point "c" on


moving axis 1

5554 Amount of compensation at compensation point "d" on


moving axis 1

5561 Amount of compensation at compensation point "a" on


moving axis 2

5562 Amount of compensation at compensation point "b" on


moving axis 2

5563 Amount of compensation at compensation point "c" on


moving axis 2

5564 Amount of compensation at compensation point "d" on


moving axis 2

5571 Amount of compensation at compensation point "a” on


moving axis 3>

106
APPENDIX 6

5572 Amount of compensation at compensation point "b" on


moving axis 3

5573 Amount of compensation at compensation point "c" on


moving axis 3

5574 Amount of compensation at compensation point "d" on


moving axis 3

Parameter input
Data format: Word format
Data unit: Detection unit
Data range: -32768''' + 32767
Set amount of compensation for each compensation point.

4.17 Parameters Related to Spindle Control

Data number Data

5600 SBI GST SGS EFP SOM GSM M4M M3M

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
The parameters listed below, excluding SBI, are effective for the cases of
FS3 or FS6 interface. They are invalid for the case of the basic machine
interface (BMI) .
M3M The polarity of the spindle speed analog output voltage when M03
(spindle CW rotation) is specified is
0: +
1: -
M4M The polarity of the spindle speed analog output voltage when M04
(spindle CCW rotation) is specified is
0: +
1: -
GSM The polarity of the spindle speed analog output voltage during gear
shift is
0: +
1:
SOM The polarity of the spindle speed analog output voltage during
spindle orientation is
0: +
1: -
EFP At the time of gear shift, the polarity of the spindle speed analog
output voltage during spindle orientation conforms to
0: M03 (spindle CW rotation) and M04 (spindle CCW rotation).
Parameters GSM and SOM are invalid
1: Parameter GSM and SOM. Parameters GSM and SOM are effective.
SGS The gear change system during thread cutting or tapping is
0: A type (same as ordinary gear change system)
1: B type (The gear is changed at the spindle speed set by the
parameters of data Nos. 5631 to 5637 during thread cutting or
tapping)

107
APPENDIX 6

GST In case of FS3 interface, the spindle orientation signal SOR


activates
0: Spindle orientation
1: Gear shift
Normally, set to 0.
SBI The spindle speed output is
0: Analog output
1: 12-bit binary output

Data number Data

5601 SCD TPB SFA NSF GSB SAL SOC SOV

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (B
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
The parameters listed below are effective for the cases of FS3 or FS6
interface. They are invalid for the case of the basic machine interface
(BMI).
SOV The spindle override is
0: Invalid
1: Effective
SOC During thread cutting (G33) or tapping (10T/11T/12T: G84, G84.1,
10M/11M/12M: G74, G84, G63), the spindle override is
0: Effective
1: Invalid
SAL When a spindle speed, beyond the maximum spindle motor speed, (data
No. 5619) is specified,
0: The speed is clamped at the maximum spindle motor speed set by
the parameter (data No. 5619).
1: An alarm is indicated for programming error
GSB In L0M/11M/12M, the gear select signal output is
0: Code output
1: Signal output in a one-to-one relation to the gear selection
NSF In
is
0: Generated
1: Not generated
SFA In L0M/11M/12M, the SF signal is generated wh<
0: The gear select signal is generated
1: An S code is specified
TPB In 10M/11M/12M, the type of spindle speed analog output/spindle
speed binary output is
0: A type
1: B type
For A type, no gear select signal is input, and a spindle speed
corresponding to the status of the gear select signal output is
output.
For B type, there is a gear select signal input, and a spindle speed
corresponding to the status of the gear select signal input is out­
put. Also for B type, the gear select signal is output in the same
manner as the A type.
Set to 1 in case of 10T/11T/12T.
SCD In 10M/11M/12M, for gear selection on the machine side,
0: The gear select signal is generated
1: The gear select signal is not generated. The specified S code
is sent out in the BCD format.

108
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5602 SAR RSC TLE TPE NAL GIB SCB SSA

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
The parameters SSA, SCB, GIB and SAR are effective for the cases of FS3 or
FS6 interface. They are invalid for the case of the basic machine
interface (BMI).
SSA The spindle stop signal (SSTP) input is of
0: B contact (spindle stop at logic "0")
1: A contact (spindle stop at logic "1")
SCB In 10M/11M/12M, to select a gear on the machine side:
0: Either the gear select signal or an S code of BCD is output.
Parameter SCD (Data number 5601) selects which one is output.
1: Both the gear select signal and an S code of BCD are output
GIB Gear select signal input is of
0: Code type (4-stage gear selection by 2 bits: For FS3 interface)
1: Bit type (4-stage gear selection by 4 bits: For FS6 interface)
NAL Spindle velocity control unit alarm is
0: Checked
1: Not checked
In 11TT, parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5604 NA2.
TPE In 10M/11M/12M, from the present position value of the axis under
constant surface speed control, the tool offset (G45 - G48) amount
is
0: Not excluded
1: Excluded
TLE From the present position value of the axis under a constant surface
speed control, the tool length compensation (G43, G44) amount is
0: Not excluded
1: Excluded (Program command position)
Normally, set to 1.
RSC For the positioning command (GOO, etc.) during a constant surface
speed control,
0: Constant surface speed control is performed by using the present
position value
1: The present position value is not used but the constant surface
speed control is performed by using the end point coordinate
value
SAR The speed arrival signal is
0: Not used
1: Used

Data number Data

5603 PDC BNT SC2 GCS

#7 #6 #5 //4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
GCS The spindle gear selection is (not used in 11TT)
0: Performed by the data (spindle speed corresponding to each gear)
of data number 5621 to 5628.

109 -
APPENDIX 6

1:
Performed by spindle speed at gear switching point set to data
number 5641 to 5647.
In this case, the minimum spindle speed during constant surface
speed control cannot be set. (Refer to data numbers 5641 to 5647.)
SC2 In 10M/11M/12M, the gear selection of the machine tool is
0: Done by parameter SCD (data number 6501#7) and SCB (data number
5602//2)
1: Done by S code output in BCD 2 digits
BNT Spindle speed variation detection is judged
0: If either condition is satisfied, after a given time (Data No.
5722) passes after the command spindle speed changes or after
the actual spindle speed reaches a constant error for the
command spindle speed.
1: Under the conditions following a lapse of a given time (Data No.
5722) after the command speed changes.
PDC Disconnection of the position coder
0: Is detected
1: Is not detected
Normally set this parameter to 0.
Set to 1 to test the system without connecting the position coder at
the time of field adjustment.
Parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5604 PD2, in case of
2-spindle lathe.

Data number Data

5604 PD 2 NA2 2SP

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 n #0 (E
Parameter entry (For 11TT)
Data format: Bit type
2SP Number of spindles are:
0: 1. (1 spindle, 2 tool posts)
1: 2. (2 spindles, 2 tool posts)
NA2 In case of 2 spindles, the velocity control unit alarm for 2
spindles are:
0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
PD2 In case of 2 spindles, the wire break check of the position coder of
the 2nd spindle is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
0 is normally set. 1 is set temporarily at installation when the
second spindle position coder is not yet connected but other test
must be performed.

Data number Data

5605 SB2 IDM IOR

#7 #6 //5 #4 #3 #2 ifl #0 (B
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
IOR When a reset is applied during the spindle positioning (indexing)
mode,
0: Spindle positioning mode is not cancelled by resetting.
1: Spindle positioning mode is cancelled by resetting.

110 -
APPENDIX 6

IDM The selection of plus/minus in the spindle positioning (by M


function; Data No. 5682),
0: Positioned to the plus direction.
1: Positioned to the minus direction
SB2 In case of 11TT,
The 2nd spindle speed output with 2 spindles equipped:
0: Analog output
1 : Binary output

Data number Data

5610 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: N power of 2
Data range: 0-3
When a position coder is mounted on the spindle for feed per revolution
(G95) or thread cutting, specify the gear ratio of the spindle to the
position coder, i.e. spindle speed/position coder speed according to the
following table.

Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Specified value

1 0
2 1
4 2
8 3

In 11TT, parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5660, in case of
2-spindle lathe.

Data number Data

5611 Number of samplings for finding the mean of spindle speed

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: N power of 2
Data range: 0-4
To eliminate adverse effects of the spindle speed fluctuation in feed per
revolution (G95) or thread cutting, the tool is moved to match the mean of
many pieces of sampling data on spindle speeds. The parameter specifies
the number of pieces of sampling data from which the mean is found.
In 11TT, parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5661, in case of 2
spindle lathe.

Number of samplings Specified value

1 0
2 1
4 2
8 3
16 4

Normally, set to 2.

Ill
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5612 Unit of spindle speed generated by BMI

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: -N power of 10 RPM
Data range: 0-3
Specify the unit of the command spindle speed (R00 - R015), actual spindle
speed (ARO - AR15) and maximum spindle speed (MRO - MR15) generated by the
BMI (basic machine interface).

Unit of spindle speed generated by BMI Specified value

1 RPM 0
0.1 RPM 1
0.01 RPM 2
0.001 RPM 3

In 11TT, Parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5662 in case of
2-spindle lathe.

Data number Data

5613 Compensation value for offset voltage of spindle speed


analog output

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: Velo
Data range: -1024 - +1024
Specify the compensation value for the offset voltage of the spindle speed
analog output.
Set value = -8191 x offset voltage (V)/12.5
How to adjust
(D Set the standard setting value 0.
© Command "0" of S analog.
© Measure the output voltage.
© Set the value of the following expression in parameter No. 5613.
-8191 x Measured voltage (V) _ n c
-------- 12- 5— (V)------ ^ “ = Setting value of parameter No. 5613
© After setting the parameter, command "0" of S anlalog again and
check that the output voltage is 0 V.
In 11TT, parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5663, in case of
2-spindle lathe.

Data number Data

5614 Data for gain adjustment of spindle speed analog output

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit : 0.1%
Data range: 700 - 1250

112
A P P E N D I X 6

Specify the data for the gain adjustment of the spindle speed analog
output.
Adjustment method
How to adjust
(T) Set standard value 1000 (FS3 or FS6 interface) or 800 (BMI
interface).
(2) Command the spindle speed in which the spindle speed analog output
makes the maximum voltage.
@ Measure the output voltage.
(4) Set the following value as the spindle speed analog output's gain
adjustment data.
Correct spindle speed analog voltage ,nnn , „WT
---------------- %--- z----- s ------x 1000 (or 800 in case of BMI
Measured voltage „
. . Setting value of
interface) = ®
parameter No. 5614
(5) After setting the parameter, command the maximum value of the S
analog again to check that the output valtage is 10.0 V.
In 11TT, parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5664, in case of
2-spindle lathe.

Data number Data

5615 Spindle motor speed during spindle gear shift

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data range: 0 - 4095
Specify the speed of the spindle motor speed during the spindle gear
shift.
This parameter is valid when the FS3/FS6 interface is used.

Data number Data

5616 Time from when spindle gear select signal is output


to when a new spindle speed is generated

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 0 - 32767
When the spindle speed analog output/spindle speed binary output is of A
type (data No. 5601, parameter TPB = 0), specify the time from when the
spindle gear select signal is output to when the spindle speed correspond­
ing to a new gear position is generated.

113
APPENDIX 6

S code specification

Spindle gear select signal -----


ouptut

Spindle speed output


corresponding to new gear
: « - Setting tim e -»

Spindle speed corresponding--------- » -H ------------- Spindle speed corresponding


to old gear position to new gear position

This parameter is valid when the FS3/FS6 interface is used.

Data number Data

5617 Spindle speed during spindle orientation

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: RPM
Data range: 0 - 32767
Specify the spindle speed during the spindle orientation.
This parameter is valid when the FS3/FS6 interface is used.

Data number Data

5618 Minimum clamp speed of spindle speed

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data range: 0 - 4095
Specify the minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor
This parameter is valid when the FS3/FS6 interface is used.
Set value = (minimum clamp speed of the spindle motor/spindle motor
speed corresponding to maximum output) x 4095

Data number Data

5619 Maximum clamp speed of spindle speed

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data range: 0 - 4095
Specify the maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor.
This parameter is valid when the FS3/FS6 interface is used.
Set value = (maximum clamp speed of the spindle motor/spindle motor
speed corresponding to maximum output) x 4095

-114
APPENDIX 6

Output voltage (binary code)

Maximum output
(10V or 4095)

Maximum clamp speed


of spindle motor

Minimum clamp speed


of spindle motor

Spindle speed command


(S code)

Data number Data

5620 Time from when S function is executed to when the


speed arrival signal is checked

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: msec
Data range: 0 - 32767
Specify the time from when the S function is executed to when the speed
arrival signal is checked.
This parameter is effective for FS3/FS6 interface.
Speed arrival signal ----------------------------- --------------------------------------- ——

S function command

Delay timer for spindle


arrival check

Pulse distribution
(G 01.G02, G03)

• Specified
value

The on-off condition of the speed arrival signal is checked at the begin­
ning of the cutting feed (G01, G02, G03) block. If it is not on, the
system waits until it is turned on; then pulse distribution is started.
When the cutting feed is specified in the same block as the S function,
the system waits for a set time after the S code is sent; then the speed
arrival signal is checked. (See the above diagram.)

115
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5621 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 1

5622 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 2

5623 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 3

5624 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 4

5625 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 5

5626 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 6

5627 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 7

5628 Maximum spindle speed corresponding to gear 8

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: rpm
Data range: 0 - 32767
Specify the spindle speed corresponding to the maximum output at each gear
position.
These parameters are valid when the 3/6 interface is used.
In case of BMI interface, set these parameters when the spindle speed
fluctuation detection function is used:

Maximum speed
(10V, 4095)
Maximum clamp speed
of spindle motor

Minimum clamp speed


of spindle motor

speed speed speed

116
A P P E N D I X 6

Data number Data

5631 Spindle speed at gear 1/gear 2 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

5632 Spindle speed at gear 2/gear 3 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

5633 Spindle speed at gear 3/gear 4 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

5634 Spindle speed at gear 4/gear 5 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

5635 Spindle speed at gear 5/gear 6 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

5636 Spindle speed at gear 6/gear 7 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

5637 Spindle speed at gear 7/gear 8 switching point during


tapping and thread cutting

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: rpm
Data range: 0 - 32767
When B type (data No. 5600, parameter SGS = 1) is selected as the gear
change system during tapping and thread cutting, specify the spindle speed
at the gear switching point.
These parameters are valid when the FS3/FS6 interface is used.

Output

Maximum output
(10V, 4095)
Maximum clamp speed
of spindle motor

Minimum clamp speed


o f spindle motor

117
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5640 Axis number of constant surface speed control

Parameter entry (For on 1st tool post in 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0 (Note), 1 - 9 (Axis number)
Specify the axis number for the constant surface speed control. However,
when the axis name for the constant surface speed control is specified by
the program, the constant surface speed control is performed for the
specified axis.
G96P__;
PI: X axis, P4 : U axis, P6 : A axis
P2 : Y axis, P5 : V axis, P7 : B axis
P3 : Z axis, P6 : W axis P8: C axis
When the axis for the constant surface speed control is not specified
with P, or when P0 is specified, the constant surface speed control is
performed for the axis set by the parameter.
(Note) When 0 is set, the constant surface speed control is performed
on the X axis. When this parameter is 0, the value of P
specified in the G96 block has nothing to do with the constant
surface speed control.
In 11TT, parameter for 2nd spindle is set to data No. 5670, in case of
2-spindle lathe.

Data number Data

5641 Minimum spindle speed at gear 1 during constant


surface speed control

5642 Minimum spindle speed at gear 2 during constant


surface speed control

5643 Minimum spindle speed at gear 3 during constant


surface speed control

5644 Minimum spindle speed at gear 4 during constant


surface speed control

5645 Minimum spindle speed at gear 5 during constant


surface speed control

5646 Minimum spindle speed at gear 6 during constant


surface speed control

5647 Minimum spindle speed at gear 7 during constant


surface speed control

5648 Minimum spindle speed at gear 8 during constant


surface speed control

118
APPENDIX 6

Parameter entry (Not uksed in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: rpm
Data range: 0 - 32767
o When parameter GCS is 0 (Refer to data number 5603)
Set the minimum spindle speed of each gear during the constant surface
speed control.
o When parameter GCS is 1 (Refer to data number 5603)
Set the spindle speed at the gear switching point. (Unit: rpm)
Data
Meaning
number
5641 Spindle speed at gear 1/gear 2
switching point

5642 Spindle speed at gear 2/gear 3


switching point

5643 Spindle speed at gear 3/gear 4


switching point

5644 Spindle speed at gear 4/gear 5


switching point

5645 Spindle speed at gear 5/gear 6


switching point

5646 Spindle speed at gear 6/gear 7


switching point

5647 Spindle speed at gear 7/gear 8

Effective for FS3/FS6 interface.


Data number Data

5660 Gear ratio of spindle to position coder on 2nd


spindle

Parameter entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: N power of 2
Data range: 0-3
Specify the gear ratio of the 2nd spindle to the position coder, i.e.
spindle speed/position coder speed according to the following table in
case of 2-spindle lathe.

Gear ratio of spindle to position coder Specified value

1 0
2 1
4 2
8 3

119 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5661 Number of samplings for finding the running mean of


spindle speed on 2nd spindle

Parameter entry (For IITT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: N power of 2
Data range: 0-4
To eliminate adverse effect of spindle speed fluctuation in feed per
revolution (G95) or thread cutting, the tool is moved to match the running
mean of many pieces of sampling data on spindle speeds on 2nd spindle.
The parameter specifies the number of pieces of sampling data from which
the running mean is found.

Number of samplings Specified value

1 0
2 1
4 2
8 3
16 4

Normally, set to 2.

Data number Data

5662 Unit of spindle speed generated by BMI on 2nd spindle

Parameter entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: -N power of 10 RPM
Data range: 0-3
Specify the unit of the command spindle speed (R00 - R015), actual spindle
speed (ARO - AR15) and maximum spindle speed (MRO - MR15) generated by the
BMI (Basec machine interface) on 2nd spindle.

Unit of spindle speed generated by BMI Specified value

1 RPM 0
0.1 RPM 1
0.01 RPM 2
0.001 RPM 3

Data number Data

5663 Compensation value for offset voltage of spindle


speed analog output on 2nd spindle

Parameter entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: Velo
Data range: -1024 - +1024

120
APPENDIX 6

Specify the compensation value for the offset voltage of spindle speed
analog output on 2nd spindle.
Set value = -8191 x offset voltage (V)/12.5
How to adjust
0 Set standard setting value 0.
0 Command "0" of S analog.
0 Measure the output voltage.
@ Set the value of the following expression in parameter No. 5613.
-8191 x Offset voltage (V) „ c^io
-------- . ■— rr-r--- 5----- = Setting value of parameter No. 5613
* j \ V )

© After setting parameter, command "0" of S analog again, and check


that the output voltage is 0 V.

Data number Data

5664 Data for gain adjustment of spindle speed analog


output on 2nd spindle

Parameter entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data unit: 0.1%
Data range: 700 - 1250
Specify the data for gain adjustment of spindle speed analog output on 2nd
spindle.
How to adjust
0 Set standard value 800.
0 Command the spindle speed in which the spindle speed analog output
makes the maximum voltage.
© Measure the output voltage.
© Set the following value as spindle speed analog output's gain
adjustment data.
__________ Measured voltage__________ = g^Q _ Setting value of
Correct spindle speed analog voltage parameter No. 5664
© After setting the parameter, command the maximum value of S analog
again, to check that the output voltage is 10.0 V.

Data number Data

5670 Axis number of constant surface speed control on


2nd tool post

Parameter entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0 (Note), 1 - 9 (Axis number)
Specify the axis number of the constant surface speed control on 2nd tool
post. However, when the axis name for constant surface speed control is
specified by the program, constant surface speed control is performed for
the specified axis.
G96P-;
PI: X axis, P9: C axis
P2: Y axis,
P3: Z axis,
When the axis for constant surface speed control is not specified with P
or when P0 is specified, constant surface speed control is performed for
the axis set by the parameter.

121
APPENDIX 6

(Note) When 0 is set, constant surface speed control is performed on


the X axis. When this parameter is 0, the value of P specified
in the G96 block, has nothing to do with the constant surface
speed control.

Data number 5680 - 5698 are used for the spindle positioning (indexing)
function.

Data number Data

5680 M code to command spindle orientation

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: Integer
Data range: 6-97
This parameter sets an M code to transfer the spindle turning mode to the
spindle positioning mode. This M code makes the spindle orientation and
the spindle positioning commands become possible in the subsequent blocks.

Data number Data

5681 M code to cancel spindle positioning

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: Integer
Data range: 6-97
This parameter sets an M code to release the spindle positioning mode and
to enter the spindle turning mode.

Data number Data

5682 M code to specify spindle positioning angle

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: Integer
Data range: 6-92
Set M code for the spindle positioning by M code (half fixed angle
indexing). 6 values, Ma - M(a + 5) can be commanded.

Data number Data

5683 Basic rotation angle in positioning by M code

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: Degree
Data range: 1-60

122 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5691 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 1

5692 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 2

5693 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 3

5694 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 4

5695 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 5

5696 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 6

5697 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 7

5698 Servo gain loop multiplier to spindle gear 8

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Word type
Data range: 1 - 32767
Set the servo loop gain multiplier to spindle gears 1 to 8 in spindle
positioning.
Set the loop gain multiplier per axis.
The loop gain multiplier is a conversion multiplier for the position
deviation amount to be converted into a speed command voltage.
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 x E x A/L
E: The speed command voltage necessary to rotate the motor in 1000 rpm
E = 2.2: In case of spindle motor which rotates in 1000 rpm with
2.2 V. (10 V, 4500 RPM)
E = 3.3: In case of spindle motor which rotates in 2000 rpm with
3.3 V. (10 V, 3000 RPM)
A: Detection unit (deg)
L: The spindle rotation angle per rotation of the motor (normal 360)
Example) When the spindle rotation angle per rotation of the motor is 360
deg, and the detection unit with a 1000 rpm spindle motor of 2.2
V is 0.088 deg/pulse:
Loop gain multiplier = 2048000 x 2.2 x 0.088/360
= 1101
Note) It was calculated 2.2 V at 1000 rpm because the spindle motor
employed was 10 V at 4500 rpm.

123 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

5701 Spindle speed ratio (q) regarded as spindle having


reached the command speed.
Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: 1%
Data range: 1 to 50
Assume the command spindle speed to be Sc and the ratio preset by this
parameter to be q: if the actual spindle speed has reached the range of
Sc-Sq to Sc + Sq, it is regarded as having reached the command speed rpm,
starting the spindle variation detection.

S<J * Sc + Too

Data number Data


Ratio (r) allowable variation width which is not
5702
handled as spindle variation detection alarm
Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: 1%
Data range: 1 to 50

Data number Data


Allowable variation speed (Sd) which is not handled
5721
as spindle variation detection alarm__________________
Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: rpm
Data range: 0 to 32767
As the command spindle speed increases, this allowable fluctuation range
increases as well.

Data number Data


Time between the change of command spindle speed and
5722 the start of spindle speed variation detection______
Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit: 64 msec
Data range: 0 to 32767
This parameter sets the time before the spindle speed variation detection
is started following the changes in the command spindle speed. In other
words, the spindle speed variations are not detected until the preset time
passes following the changes in the command spindle speed. However, as
explained in Data No. 5701, if the actual spindle speed reaches the range
between Sc - Sq and Sc + Sq before the time set by this parameter elapses,
the detection of spindle speed variations is started.
Whether or not the actual spindle speed fluctuates more than the allowable
command speed is determined in the following manner. That is, with the
higher spindle speed of the following 2 speeds Sd, Sr as the allowable
fluctuating speed Sm, the maximum spindle speed Sm max allowable and the
minimum spindle speed Sm min allowable by adding and subtracting Sm from

124 -
APPENDIX 6

the command speed Sc. When the actual spindle speed exceeds Sm max or is
less than Sm min, an alarm is produced, as there is more variation from
the allowable speed.
Sm max = Sc + Sm
Sm min = Sc - Sm
However, Sm is the higher speed of Sd/Sr.
Sd : Allowable constant variation width irrespective of the command
spindle speed. Set at data No. 5721.
Sr : Allowable variation width obtained by multiplying a constant ratio
by command spindle speed Sc. Ratio r is set with data No. 5702.
r
Sr Sc x
100

4.18 Parameters Related to Tool Offset

Data number Data

6000 LWM LD1 LVK LXY ND3 PCI PNH EV0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
EV0 When the offset value is changed, the new offset value is effective
from
0: The next block where the D or H code (or T code for lathe
system) is specified next
1: The next block which is loaded in the buffer register
PNH The tool offset (G45 - G48) number (F10M/11M/12M) is specified by
0: D code
1: H code
Normally, set to 0.
PCI For the arc command (F10M/11M/12M), the tool offset (G45 - G48) is
0: Invalid
1: Effective
Normally, set to 0.
ND3 The offset number of tool offset (11T/12T)
0: is specified by lower 3 digits.
1: conforms to LD1.
LXY The axis for the tool length compensation (G43, G44) (F10M/11M/12M)
is
0: Always the Z axis
1: Any axis specified by the program
LVK By resetting the tool length compensation (or tool offset for lathe
system) vector is
0: Cleared
1: Maintained without being cleared
LD1 The tool offset number is specified by (F10T/11T/12T)
0: Low order two digits of the T code
1: Low order one digit of the T code
LWM The tool offset is applied (F10T/11T/1ITT/12T) in case parameter
LWT = 0 (Data No. 6001) or LGT = 1 (Data No. 6001) (indicating that
tool position is compensated by moving the tool)
0: Even in a block containing no movement command
1: Only in a block containing the movement command

125
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6001 CNI LGC LGN LWT LGT CNC CSU

#7 #6 #5 H #3 #2 ill #0 (I
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
CSU The type of start up in the cutter compensation or the tool nose R
compensation (G41, G42) is
0: A type
1: B type

Programmed path

B
/ c

Start up A type

CNC When the programmed movement direction and the offset movement
direction differ by 90° to 270° in an interference check of the
cutter compensation or the tool nose R compensation (G41, G42), an
alarm is
0: Indicated
1: Not indicated
LGT Tool geometry offset (10T/11T/11TT/12T) is done
0: by moving the tool
1: by shifting work coordinate system
LWT Tool wear offset (F10T/11T/11TT/12T) is done
0: by moving the tool
1: by shifting work coordinate system
LGN Tool offset (10T/11T/11TT/12T) is done as follows:
0: The lower 3, 2 or 1 digit of the T code specifies geometry and
wear offset numbers.
In other words, geometry offset and wear offset numbers are in
common.
1: The lower 3, 2 or 1 digit of the T code specifies wear offset
number and tool number digit(s) (lower 4, 3 2 or higher digits
of the T code) specifies geometry offset number.
LGC When the offset number 0 is specified with parameter LGN=0 (wear
offset number and geometry offset number are common)
(10T/11T/11TT/12T)
0: Both wear and geometry offsets are cancelled.
1: Wear offset is cancelled while geometry offset is not cancelled.
CNI The interference check for the cutter compensation C or the tool
nose radius compensation is
0: Performed
1: Not performed

126 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6002 PRC QNI ZCO CRC OFN ORG

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (B
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
ORG,OFN Offset value unit (Not used in 11TT)
Offset value unit
OFN ORG
In millimeters In inches
0 0 0.001 mm 0,0001 inch
0 1 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
1 0 0.0001 mm 0.00001 inch

ORC The tool offset value (10T/11T/11TT/12T) is


0: Specified by diameter value
(Effective for an axis of diameter programming. For an axis of
radius programming, tool offset value shall be set by radius
value.)
1: Specified by radius value
ZCO With reference point return (auto/manual-G28), tool offset
(F10T/11T/12T) is:
0: Not cancelled
1: Cancelled
QNI In tool compensation value measured value input B function
(10T/11T/11TT/12T) or tool length measurement B function
(10M/11M/12M), tool offset value is designated by:
0: Operation (cursor selection) from CRT/MDI unit
1: Signal from the machine side
PRC In the case of the direct input of measured tool offset
(F10T/11T/11TT/12T)
0: Position record signal PRC is not used.
Offset value is modified by the difference between the absolute
coordinate value when a measured value is input and the input
measured value.
1: Position record signal PRC is used.
Offset value is modified by the difference between the absolute
coordinate value when position record signal PRC is turned on
and the input measured value.

Data number Data

6010 Limit value for ignoring small movement amount created


by cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation

Setting entry
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

127
APPENDIX 6

Data range: 0 - 99999999


When the cutter compensation is activated and the tool moves outside a
corner, specify the limit value for ignoring a small movement amount
created by the cutter compensation.
This eliminates a speed change due to the interruption of buffering at the
Actual tool path

Data number Data

6011 Denominator constant by three-dimensional tool offset

Setting entry (For 10M/11M/12M)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 99999999


Specify the value of p in the calculation formula for three-dimensional
cutter compensation vector:
Vx = i x r/p
Vy = j x r/p
Vz = k x r/p
where
Vx,Vy,Vz: Three-dimensional cutter compensation vectors of X, Y and
Z axes or the parallel axes respectively
i, j, k : Value specified by I, J and K in the program
r : Offset value
p : Parameter value
When the value is set to 0, the following holds:
p = SQRT (ixi + jxj + kxk)

128
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation value

Parameter entry (10T/11T/11TT/12T)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit: Depends on data No. 6002 OFN, ORG
Data ragne: _____________ ______________
Data range OFN ORG

0 to 999999 0 0
0 to 99999 0 1
0 to 9999999 1 0

This function sets the maximum value of tool wear compensation value.
When an attempt is made to set the tool wear compensation value (its
absolute value), which may exceed the parameter preset value, an alarm is
produced.
When entering the tool wear compensation value according to G10 command,
external data input or custom macro variables, or when entering the
compensation value from MDI, this function checks to see if the parameter
present value is exceeded. When the parameter preset value is 0, no such
checkup is carried out. When inputting the compensation value with a
radius value (data No. 6002, ORC = 1), set this parameter as well, using a
radius value.

Data number Data


Maximum tool wear compensation value of incremental
6014
entry______________ _______________________________
parameter entry (10T/11T/11TT/12T)
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit: Depends on data No. 6002 OFN, ORG
Data ragne: _________________________________
Data range OFN ORG

0 to 999999 0 0
0 to 99999 0 1
0 to 9999999 1 0

This parameter sets the maximum input allowable value of incremental input
of tool wear compensation value. When the incremental input value (its
absolute value) exceeds the parameter preset value, an alarm is produced.
This function checks to see if the parameter preset value is exceeded when
the tool wear compensation value is entered, using G10 command, external
data input and custom macro variables, for example, in addition to the
incremental input of compensation value from MDI.
When the parameter preset value is 0, no such checkup is carried out.
When inputting the compensation value with a radius value (Data No. 6002
ORC = 1), also set this parameter with a radius value.
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

Distance up to X-axis + contact face (Xp)

Distance up to X-axis - contact face (Xm)

Distance up to Z-axis + contact face (Zp)

Distance up to Z-axis - contact face (Zm)

Parameter entry (IOT/11T/12T)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

Increment system
Remarks
IS-A IS-B

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch

Set the distance between the measuring standard position and the contact
faces of sensor (with code).
For the diameter-programming axis, use the diameter value for setting.

-Q Measuring standard
X-axis ( ^ ) contact position
Xp Xm face

Z-axis (+ )
contact ——Z-axis ( ^ ) contact
face face
Zm
X-axis (+ ) contact face
---------------------------Zp
+z

130
APPENDIX 6

4.19 Parameters Related to Canned Cycle


Data number Data

6200 EXC UIL FCU SIJ DWL FXY

#7 H #5 H #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)
Data format: Bit type
FXY The hole machining axis in the canned cycle is
0: Always the Z axis
1: The axis selected by a program
DWL The dwell command by P in the canned tapping cycle is
0: Invalid
1: Effective
SIJ After spindle orientation in the canned fine boring cycle and back
boring cycle,
0: The tool retract direction is set by a parameter and the move­
ment amount is specified by a program (Q).
When the parameter is set to 0, specify the tool retract direc­
tion by the parameter of data No. 6240.
1: The tool retract direction and the movement amount are specified
by the program (I, J, K)
FCU The movement to the hole machining point in the canned cycle is
0: Always at rapid traverse
1: At rapid traverse in the positioning mode (GOO), or at linear
interpolation in a mode (G01, G02, G03) other than the
positioning mode
UIL When the origin is set by MDI during canned cycle, the initial level
point of the canned cycle is
0: Not changed
1: Changed. For origin setting by MDI, the set position becomes
the initial level point.
EXC G81 specifies (10M, 11M, 12M)
0: The canned cycle
1: The external operation command

Data number Data

6201 NFM FM2 FIN NM5 FXB

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)
Data format: Bit type
FXB The spindle control in the canned cycle is performed by
0: The spindle stop command signal (SSP) and the spindle CCW rota­
tion command signal (SRV), instead of the M code (Canned cycle
I)
1: The M code (M03, M04, M05) (Canned cycle II)

131
APPENDIX 6

(G84, Canned cycle I)

(G84, Canned cycle II)

NM5 When the spindle rotating direction is changed from CW (M03) to CCW
(M04) or from CCW (M04) to CW (M03) in the canned cycle,
0: M05 is output, that is, M05 is output before M03 and M04 are
sent. (M05-M04, or M05-M03)
1: M05 is not output, that is, M05 is not output before M03 or M04
is sent.
This parameter is effective when parameter FXB = 1.
FIN The finish of the spindle stop command signal (SSP) and the spindle
CCW rotation command signal (SRV) is informed by the input of
0: FFIN signal (special finish signal for the SSP and SRV signals)
1: FIN signal (finish signal for M, S, T and B)
This parameter is effective when parameter FXB = 0.
FM2 When the spindle stop command signal (SSP) and the spindle CCW rota­
tion command signal (SRV) are output, after returning to the R point
or the initial point, the FMF (SSP, SRV signal read command) signal
is
0: Not sent out
1: Sent out
This parameter is effective when parameter NFM = 0.
NFM When the spindle stop command signal (SSP) and the spindle CCW rota­
tion command signal (SRV) are output, the FMF (SSP, SRV signal read
command) signal is
0: Also sent out
1: Not sent out

132
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6202 CDI CDO NRC MOR

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)
Data format: Bit type
MOR In a block having no movement command during the canned turning
cycle mode, the turning cycle is
0: Not performed
1: Performed
NRC At the end of the roughing cycle (G71, G72), finishing for the
roughing is
0: Performed
1: Not performed
CDO For infeed during the roughing cycle (G71, G72),
0: An override cannot be applied
1: An override can be applied
When this parameter is set to 1, an override can be specified by
setting operation at the parameter of data No. 6214.
CDI Override specification of the cutting value for roughing cycle (G71,
G72)
0: is specified by setting entry of Data No. 6214.
1: is specified by a signal from machine side.
This parameter is effective when CDO = 1.

Data number Data

6210 Return amount in canned cycle G73 (G83.1 in lathe system)

Setting entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 99999999


Specify the return amount in the canned cycle G73 or G83. 1 in the lathe
system.

133
APPENDIX 6

G73 (High speed peck drilling cycle)


d: Return amount

G73 (with G99) G73 (with G98)

Initial point

t I
I I
I
I

i
1

)
Point Z Point Z

Data number Data

6211 Clearance amount in canned cycle G83

Setting entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 99999999


Set the clearance amount in the canned cycle G83. ,
d: Clearance amount

G83 (with G99) G83 (with G98)

Initial
<?
I i | point
I i
I i
I
i ; I I t, Point R q
q * ; -i t ,
q q
q q
i 1— Point Z i 1— Point Z

134 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6212 Chamfering amount in thread cutting cycle

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: 0.1 pitch
Data range: 0 - 127
Specify the chamfering amount in the thread cutting cycle G76, G78 (G76,
G92 in case of G code system A).
Chamfering is started from a point prior to the specified thread cutting
end point by the chamfering amount set by the parameter.

Data number Data

6213 Chamfering angle in thread cutting cycle

Setting entry (For 10T, HT, 11TT, 12T)


I
Data format: Byte type
l Data unit: 1 deg
ff Data range: 0-60
Specify the chamfering angle in the thread cutting cycle G76, G78 (G76,
G92 in case of G code system A).

Data number Data

6214 Override amount for infeed in roughing cycle


(G71, G72)

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12)


Data format: Byte type
Data unit: 1%
Data range: 0 - 255
Specify the override amount for infeed in the roughing cycle (G71, G72).
This parameter is effective when the parameter CDO = 1, CDI * 0 at data
No. 6202.
The override amount can be changed by setting during the roughing cycle.

Data number Data

6215 Retract amount in roughing cycle (G71, G72)

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


Data format: Word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 32767


Specify the retract amount in the roughing cycle (G71, G72).

135
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6216 Clearance amount in roughing cycle (G71, G72)

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


Data format: Word type

Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 32767


Specify the clearance amount in the roughing cycle (G71, G72).
In a roughing cycle involving pockets, axes are moved at rapid traverse
to the roughing start point for the next pocket by the set clearance
amount before it.

Data number Data

6217 Return amount in peck cycle (G74, G75)

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


Data format: Word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 32767


Specify the return amount in peck drilling or groving (G74, G75).

Data number Data

6218 Minimum infeed amount in thread cutting cycle (G76)

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


Data format: Word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 32767


When the infeed amount of one pass in the thread cutting cycle (G76)
becomes smaller than the minimum infeed amount set by the parameter, the
infeed amount is clamped at the minimum infeed amount.

136
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

6219 Finish allowance in thread cutting cycle (G76)

Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


Data format: Word type
Data unit:

IS-A IS-B Unit

In millimeters 0.01 0.001 mm


In inches 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 32767


Specify the finish allowance in the thread cutting cycle (G76).

Data number Data

6220 Number of repetitions in thread cutting


cycle (G76) of last finishing cycle____
Setting entry (For 10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)
Data format: Word type
Data unit:
Data range: 0 - 255
Specify the number of repetitions of the last finishing for the thread
cutting cycle (G76).

Data number Data

6240 Tool retract direction after G76, G87 orientation

Parameter entry (Not used in 11TT)


Data format: Byte axis type
Data range: -15 - +15
Specify the tool retract axis and direction after the spindle orientation
in the canned cycles G76 (G86.1 in lathe system) and G87. The tool
retract axis and direction after orientation can be specified in
accordance with each hole machining axis. The axis number is specified by
a value, and the direction is specified by the "+" and signs.
Example: When the hole machining axis is the X axis and the tool retract
direction after orientation is +Z, when the hole machining axis
is the Y axis and the tool retract direction after orientation
is +Z, and when the hole machining axis is Z axis and the tool
retract direction after orientation is -X, specify as shown
below. (However, when the 1st, 2nd and 3rd axes are the X, Y
and Z axis)
1st axis parameter: -2 (Tool retract direction is -Y)
2nd axis parameter: 3 (Tool retract direction is +Z)
3rd axis parameter: -1 (Tool retract direction is - x )
Set 0 for other axes.

137
APPENDIX 6

4.20 Parameters Related to Scaling and Coordinate Rotation

The parameters described in this section are not used in 1ITT.

Data number Data

6400 RTR SCR RIN

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
(
Parametner entry (For 10M/11M/12M)
Data format: Bit type
RIN The designation of the angle (R) of the coordinate system rotation
(G68) is
0: Always an absolute value
1: Of absolute (G90)/incremental (G9I) mode
SCR The scaling (G51) magnification unit is in,
0: 0.00001 times unit
1: 0.001 times unit
RTR The coordinate system rotation (G68), rotation angle unit is in,
0: 0.00001 deg unit
1: 0.001 deg unit

Data number Data

6410 Magnification of scaling (G51)

Setting entry (For 10M/11M/12M)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit: 0.001/0.00001 (selected by parameter SCR, Data No. 6400#1)
Data range: 1 - 999999
Specify the scaling magnification. When the scaling magnification is not
specified (P) in the program, the value set by this parameter is used as
the scaling magnification.

Data number Data

6411 Angle of coordinate system rotation (G68)

Setting entry (For 10M/11M/12M)


Data format: 2-word type
Data unit: 0.001/0.00001 deg (selected by parameter RTR, Data No. 6400#2)
Data range: -36000000 - +36000000
Specify the angle of the coordinate system rotation.
When the coordinate rotation angle (R) is not specified in the program,
the value set by this parameter is used as the coordinate system rotation
angle.

138
APPENDIX 6

4.21 Parameters Related to Automatic Corner Override

Data number Data

6610 Minimum reduction ratio at circle internal cutting


speed

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data unit: %
Data range: 0 - 100

In case of the internal offset circular cutting, the feedrate in the


programmed path is set to the specified F by setting actual feedrate to F
x Rx/Rp (where, Rc: Cutter center path radius, Rp: programmed radius) with
reference to the specified feedrate (F).

However, if Rc is very small as compared with Rp, Rc/Rp =r 0, causing the


cutter to stop. Accordingly, the minimum reduction ratio (MDR) is set to
set the actual feedrate to F x (MDR) when Rc/Rp _< MDR.

The feedrate is overridden from point a to b.


In case of an arc, this override function to the end point of a block is
effective when the following condition satisfied.
(1) The distance is within Le.

The override function to the start point of a block becomes effective when
the following condition satisfied.
(1) The distance is within Ls.

139
APPENDIX 6

Data unit:
Setting unit
Remarks
IS-A IS-B
Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 99999999

Data number Data

6614 Deceleration distance from the start point for


internal corner automatic corner override (Ls)

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit:
Setting5 unit
Remarks
IS—A IS-B
Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm
Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - 99999999


When 0 ^ 0p, the corner is regarded as inside.
0p value is set by parameter (No. 6611) (2 < 9p < 178 unit0)
When a corner is judged as inside, the feedrate is overridden from the
distance range within Le of the block on this side from the intersection
of the corner to the distance range within Ls of the next block from the
intersection of the corner. Distances Ls and Le are linear distances from
a point on the cutter center path to the intersection of the corner. Le
and Ls are set by parameters (No. 6613 and 6614), respectively.

The feedrate is overridden from point a to point b.

4.22 Parameters Related to Uni-Directional Positioning

The parameters described in this section are not used in 11TT.

Data number Data

6820 Approach amount and direction in uni-directional


positioning (G60)

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data format: Word axis type
APPENDIX 6

Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric system machine 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch
Rotary axis 0.01 0.001 deg

Data range: -32767 - 32767


Specify the approach amount and direction in uni-directional positioning
(G60) for each axis. The uni-directional positioning direction is speci­
fied by the sign of the set data, and the approach amount is specified by
the value of the set data.
Approach amount >0: Positioning direction is plus.
Approach amount <0: Positioning direction is minus.
Approach amount =0: No uni-directional positioning is done.

Approach amount
\
i"
i
1
1 ..............
/
/
Positioning direction (+)

4.23 Parameters Related to Custom Macro

Data number Data

7000 PRT CLV GMP CVA MGE BCS SCS TCS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
TCS By the T code, the custom macro (subprogram) is
0: Not called
1: Called
ses By the S code, the custom macro (subprogram) is
0: Not called
1: Called
BCS By the 2nd auxiliary function code, the custom macro (subprogram) is
0: Not called
1: Called
MGE 0: The user G code modal call is call after move (G66 equivalent)
1: The user G code modal call is per block all (G66.1 equivalent)
CVA 0: The macro call factor is delivered in NC format
1: The macro call factor is converted into macro format and
delivered
(Example) When G65P X10; , argument in subprogram is
CVA = 0 CVA = 1
#24 : 0.01 0.01
ADP #24: 10.0 0.01
(Note) The external move is the same unless the ADP function is
used.

142
V-

APPENDIX 6

GMP The user M, S, T, B codes call during user G code call, and the user
G code call during user M, S, T, B call are
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed (Executed as ordinary M, S, T, B, G codes)
CLV By resetting, common variables 1 #100 - #119 (common variables
cleared by power off) of the custom macro are
0: Not cleared
1: Cleared to zero
PRT 0: Space is output when reading zero with DPRNT
1: Nothing is output when reading zero with DPRNT

Data number Data

7001 F6W

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
F6W 0: The system variable number of work offset amount is FS9 type
1: The system variable number of work offset amount is FS6 type
FS9 type variable numbers can also be used when F6W = 1.

Data number Data

7002 MIN TSE MPR MSB MUS

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (B
MUS 0: Custom macro interrupt function is not used.
1: Custom macro interrupt function is used.
MSB 0: They are different.
1: Values of local variables in the interrupt program are the same
as those in the main program.
MPR 0: Custom macro interrupt is controlled by M96 and M97.
1: Custom macro interrupt control M code is parameter set.
TSE 0: Edge trigger-type custom macro interrupt
1: Status trigger-type custom macro interrupt
MIN 0: NC statements in the interrupt program are executed by
interrupting the block under execution.
1: NC statements in the interrupt program are executed after
completion of the block.

Data number Data

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0

*7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0

=7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0

143
APPENDIX 6

7015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0

7016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0

7017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
0 - 7 Specify the EIA code indicating " " in the hole pattern,
0 - 7 Specify the EIA code indicating in the hole pattern,
#0 - #7 Specify the EIA code indicating "#" in the hole pattern,
*0 - * 7 Specify the EIA code indicating in the hole pattern,
=0 - =7 Specify the EIA code indicating in the hole pattern,
?0 - ?7 Specify the EIA code indicating "?" in the hole pattern,
@0 - @7 Specify the EIA code indicating in the hole pattern,
&0 - &7 Specify the EIA code indicating in the hole pattern,
The suffix numerals indicates the bit positions of the codes.
0: Indicates that the corresponding bit is 0
1: Indicates that the corresponding bit is 1

Data number Data

7031 Prefix number of variable desired to protect - 500

Parameter input
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0 - 1 2 7 (#500 - #627)

Data number Data

7032 Number of variables desired to protect

Parameter input
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0 - 127 (If 0, not protected)
When desired to protect from #545 to #550, for instance, set 45 for the
parameter 7031 and 6 for 7032.

Data number Data

7033 M code which makes the custom macro interrupt effective

7034 M code which makes the custom macro interrupt ineffective

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range: 0-99
Parameter 7033 and 7034 are effective only when MPR = 1 in data number
7002.

144
A P P E N D I X 6

Data number Data

7050 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9010

7051 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9011

7052 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9012

7053 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9013

7054 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9014

7055 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9015

7056 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9016

7057 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9017

7058 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9018

7059 G code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9019
Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data range: 0 - 999
Specify the G codes for calling the custom macros of program Nos. 9010 to
9019.

Data number Data

7071 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9001

7072 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9002

7073 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9003

7074 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9004

7075 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9005

7076 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9006

145
APPENDIX 6

7077 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9007

7078 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9008
'
7079 M code for calling the custom macro of program No. 9009

Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data range: 0 - 9999
Specify the M codes for calling the custom macros of program No. 9001-
9009.

Data number Data


M code for calling the custom macro of program
number 9020

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9021

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9022

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9023

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9024

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9025

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9026

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9027

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9028

M code for calling the custom macro of program


number 9029
Parameter entry
Data format: Byte type
Data range : 0-99
These parameters set M codes for calling the custom macros of program
numbers 9020 to 9029.
With M codes of data No. 7080 to 7089, arguments can be transferred to the
called programs.
On the other hand, with M codes of data No. 7071 to 7079, arguments can be
transferred to the called programs.

146 -
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

7110 Order when moving in dry run at program restart

Setting input
Data format: Byte axis type
Data range: 1 - (Number of controlled axes)
After program restart, the order of the axes to move to the restart
position in dry run must be specified in axes order. If numbers other
than the controlled axes are input, an alarm will generate when the
program restarts.

4.24 Parameters Related to Skip Functions

Data number Data

7200 SRE SFP HSS DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1

//7 //6 it 5 #4 7/3 #2 //1 tto (Bit)

V
> Parameter input
Data format: Bit type
DS1 - DS4 (F10M/11M/12M)
Set which skip signal is valid to command of G04 (dwell). The skip
signal and the bit match as follows.
Skip signal High speed skip signal Bit name
SKIP1 HDI0 DS1
SKIP2 HDI1 DS2
HDI2 DS3 \
SKIP3
//
SKIP4 HDI3 DS4
HSS The high speed skip signal is

ôe
0: Not used in the skip function. Conventional type skip is used.
1: Used in the skip function.
SFP The feedrate during execution of the multi-step skip function is
0: The program-commanded F code speed.
1: The speed set by parameter (data number 7211 - 7214).
SRE When high speed skip signal is used
0: Check the input signal at rise-up time of signal
1: Check the input signal at rise-down time of signal

Data number Data


G31.2 G31 (G31.1)

7201 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter entry (10M/11M/12M)
Data format: Bit type
1S1 - 1S4; Set the skip signal which is valid to skip commands of G31 or
G31.1. The high speed signals and the bits match as follows.
Skip signal High speed skip signal Bit name
SKIP1 HDI0 1S1
SKIP2 HDI1 1S2
SKIP3 HDI2 1S3
SKIP4 HDI3 1S4

147
APPENDIX 6

2S1 - 2S4; Set the skip signal which is valid to skip commands of G3I.2.
The high speed signals and the bits match as follows.
(Not used in 1ITT)
Conventional skip signal High ;d skip signal Bit name
SKIP1 HDIO 2S1
SKIP 2 HDII 2S2
SKIP3 HDI2 2S3
SKIP4 HDI3 2S4

Data number Data


--- G31 .4 ---- -- G3I. 3 ----
1--- ---1 1---- ---1
7202 4S4 4S3 4S2 4SI 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1

#7 #6 #5 H in #2 iil HO (Bit)
Parameter entry (10M/11M/12M)
Data format: Bit type
3S1 - 3S4; Set the skip signal which is valid to skip commands of G31.3.
The high speed signals and the bits match as follows.
Conventional skip signal High speed skip signal Bit name
SKIP I HDIO 3S1
SKIP2 HDII 3S2
SKIP3 HDI2 3S3
SKIP4 HDI3 3S4
4SI - 4S4; Set the skip signal which is valid to skip commands of G3I 4.
The high speed signals andI the bits match as follows.
Conventional skip signal High speed skip signal Bit name
SKIP1 HDIO 4S1
SKIP2 HDII 4S2
SKIP3 HDI2 4S3
SKIP4 HDI3 4S4

Data number Data

7211 Feedrate of skip function (G31, G31.1)

7212 Feedrate of skip function (G31.2)

7213 Feedrate of skip function (G31.3)

7214 Feedrate of skip function (G31.4)

Parameter input (Data number 7212-7214 are not used in 10T/11T/11TT/12T)


Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch input 1.0 0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis 10.0 1.0 deg/min

148 -
APPENDIX 6

However, when the high resolution detector is used (Data No. 1804 parameter
PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above unit.
Data range: 0 - 32767
Set skip function feedrate per G code.
This parameter is valid when 1 (skip function feedrate is the speed set by
the parameter) is set to parameter SFP (Data No. 7200).

4.25 Parameters Related to Automatic Tool Offset (10T/11T/12T) and Automatic


Tool Length Measurement (10M/11M/12M)

Data number Data

7300 G36 AMH MDC

ill #6 #5 #4 #3 H2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter input
Data format: Bit type
MDC 0: Substract
1: Add
The tool measured amount to the current offset amount.
AMH High speed skip (measuring position reach) signal is
0: Not used for automatic tool offset. (Conventional type signal
is used.)
1: Used for automatic tool offset.
- In place of G37.1 and G37.2 of automatic tool compensation of 10T/11T/12T,
G36 and G37 are
0: Not used
1: Used

Data number Data

7311 Measurement feed rate with tool measurement 1


(10T/11T/12T)
Measurement feed rate with tool length measurement
(10M/11M/12M)

7312 Measurement feed rate with tool measurement 2


(10T/11T/11TT/12T)

7313 Measurement feed rate with tool measurement 3


(10T/11T/11TT/12T)

Parameter input
Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 10.0 1.0 mm/min


Inch input 1.0 0.1 inch/min

However, when the high resolution detector is provided (Data No. 1804,
parameter PLC01=1), the unit is ten times the above unit.

149 -
APPENDIX 6

Data range: I - 6000


Tool measurement 1, 2, 3 in 10T/11T/11TT/12T means G37.1 (or G37), G37.2
or G37.3. Tool length measurement in 10M/11M/12M means G37.

Data number Data

7321 y value of tool measurement 1 (10T/11T/11TT/12T)


Y value of tool length measurement (10M/11M/12M)

7322 Y value of tool measurement 2 (10T/11T/11TT/12T)

7323 Y value of tool measurement 3 (10T/11T/11TT/12T)

Setting input
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:
Input unit
unie
IS-A IS-B
Linear axis (metric input) 0.01 0.001 mm
Linear axis (inch input) 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: -99999999 - 99999999


(1) X axis takes the radius value in lathes.
(2) Set value larger than the parameter tool set e value.

Data number Data

7331 e value of tool measurement 1 (10T/11T/11TT/12T)


e value of tool length measurement (10M/11M/12M)

7332 e value of tool measurement 2 (10T/11T/11TT/12T)

7333 e value of tool measurement 3 (10T/11T/11TT/12T)

Setting input
Data format: 2-word type
Data unit:
Input unit
Unit
IS-A IS-B
Linear axis (metric input) 0.01 0.001 mm
Linear axis (inch input) 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: -99999999 - 99999999


X axis takes the radius value in lathes.

150 -
V

APPENDIX 6

Data number Data


-- G37 .2 ---- --- 1 - G37.1 (G37) -
I— 1 --- 1

7600 2A4 2A3 2A2 2A1 1A4 1A3 1A2 1A1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (
Parameter input
Data format: Bit type
1A1 - 1A4:
Set the high speed signal which becomes valid to the G37.1 (G37)
command. The high speed signal and the bits match as follows.
High speed signal Bit name
HDIO 1A1
HDI1 1A2
HDI2 1A3
HDI3 1A4
2A1 - 2A4; Set the high speed signal which becomes valid to the G37.2
(10T/11T/12T) command. The high speed signals and the bits
match as follows.
High speed signal Bit name
i HDIO 2A1
) HDI1 2A2
HDI2 --- 2A3
HDI3 2A4

Data number Data


G37.3

7601 3A4 3A3 3A2 3A1

#1 it 6 #5 #4 in #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Parameter input (10T/11T/12T)
Data format: Bit type
3A1 - 3A4; Set the high speed signal which becomes valid to the G37.3
command. The high speed signals and the bits match as
follows.
High speed signal Bit name
HDIO 3A1
HDI1 3A2
HDI2 3A3
HDI3 3A4

151
APPENDIX 6

4.26 Parameters Related to Interference Check

Data number Data

7605 NBC IFE ITO IFM TY1 TYO

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #1 //0 (Bit)
Parameter entry (For 11TT)
Data format: Bit type
TY1, TYO Set the relation of the two tool posts coordinates.

+x • T ool post 2
TY1 TYO
0 0 I
Î T ool post 1
+z

k x f+ x T ool post 1
Tool post 2
0 1
I
+z +z
+X Tool post 1

+z I
1 0
| T ool post 2 +z

+X
+X
! Tool post 1

-+ z
1 1
-+ z

Tool post 2
+x

152 -
APPENDIX 6

IFM Tool post interference check in manual mode is:


0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
ITO When offset number 0 is commanded by T code:
0: Tool post interference check is stopped till offset numbers
other than 0 is command by T code next.
1: Continues tool post interference check with the old offset
number.
IFE When conditions for tool post interference check are satisfied, tool
post interference check is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
0 is normally set. Set 1 temporarily, when too post interference
check is not necessary in installation, etc.
NBC The interference check at block restart is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.

Data number Data

7682 X axis direction distance from 1st tool post


reference point to 2nd tool post reference point.

7683 Z axis direction distance from 1st tool post


reference point to 2nd tool post reference point.

Parameter entry (For 11TT)


Data format: Long word type
Data unit:

Setting unit IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric machines 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch machines 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 - +99999999

2nd tool post

153
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data


Allowable value (d) of interference check at block
7651
r e s t a r t _______________________________________
Parameter entry
Data format: Word type
Data unit:

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric entry 0.01 0.001 mm


Inch entry 0.001 0.0001 inch

4.27 Parameters Related to Tool Life Management

The parameters described in this section are not used in 11TT

Data number Data

7400 ABT SNG RAG LTM SIG GS2 GS1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (
GS1, GS2; Specify the number of registerable tool groups and the number of
tools to be registered per group.

In case optional function In case optional function


"Tool life management 512 "Tool life management 512
pairs" is not provided. pairs" is provided.
GS2 GS1
Max. No. Max. No. Max. No. Max. No.
of groups of tools of groups of tools

0 0 16 16 64 32

0 1 32 8 128 16

1 0 64 4 256 8

1 1 128 2 512 4

SIG 1 Inputs group No. for tool skip


0 Input no group No.
LTM 1 Specifies tool life by time.
0 Specifies tool life by frequency.
PAG 1 Clears the execution data of all the registered groups when tool
change reset signal is input.
0: Clears the execution data of a specified group if the tool life
of the group is reached when tool change reset signal is input.
SNG 1: When a tool other than that for tool life management is selected
and the tool skip signal is input, the signal is ignored.
0: When a tool other than that for tool life management is selected
and the tool skip signal is input, a tool belonging to the group
last employed or a tool belonging to the specified group (by
parameter SIG) is skipped.

154 -
APPEND

ABT 1: In tool change method A, if the return tool number does not
belong to the same group under execution, an alarm is informed.
0: In tool change method A, even if the return tool number does not
belong to the same group under execution, no alarm is informed.

Data number Data

7401 CT2 CT1

#7 //6 #5 #4 #3 n #1 #0 (Bit)

Parameter entry
Data type: Bit type
CT1, CT2: Selection of tool change method is made.

CT2 CT1 Change method

0 0 A

0 1 B

1 0 C

Data number Data

7440 Tool life management ignore number 1 ^ 9999

Parameter entry
Data type : Word type

When a value exceeding the value set here is specified as a T code, the
value subtracting the T code value by this parameter value becomes the
tool group number of the tool life management.

4.28 Parameters Related to Software Operator's Panel

Data number Data

7603 0PG7 0PG6 0PG5 0PG4 0PG3 0PG2 0PG1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 //1 //0 (Bit)


Setting entry
Data format: Bit axis type

0PG7 1 Feed hold is effected with the software operator's panel.


0 Feed hold is not effected with the software operator's panel.
0PG6 1 Protect key is actuated with the software operator's panel.
0 Protect key is not actuated with the software operator's panel.
0PG5 1 Optional block skip, single block, machine lock and dry run
switches are actuated with the software operator's panel.
0 The above switches are not actuated with the software operator's
panel.

155
APPENDIX 6

0PG4 I: Jog feedrate, override, and rapid traverse override switches are
actuated with the software operator's panel.
0: The above switches are not actuated with the software operator's
panel.
OPG3 1 : Axis select (HX, HZ) and magnification (xlO) switches for manual
pulse generator are actuated with the software operator's panel.
0 : The above switches are not actuated with the software operator's
panel.
OPG2 1 : Jog feed axis select and jog rapid traverse buttons are actuated
with the software operator's panel.
0 : The above switches are not actuated with the software operator's
panel.
OPGI 1: Mode select is conducted from the software operator's panel.
0 : Mode select is not conducted from the software operator's panel.

Note 1) The Parameters of data No. 2020, 2021, 2311 to 2388 are also the
parameters on the software operator's panel.

4.29 Parameters Related to Exponential Function Interpolation

Data number Data

7610 CBK

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data type: Bit type

The commanding method of the amount of division (span value) of the linear
axis in the exponential function interpolation is specified as follows:

CBK
0: It is set by the parameter (No. 7685).
1: It is set by the address K along with the command of the G02.3/G03.3.

Data number Data

The number of linear axis for performing the


exponential function interpolation.

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data type: Byte type
Data range: 1 - number of controlled axes

Set the sequence number of the linear axis which is applied the
exponential function interpolation.

Data number Data

The number of rotary axis for performing the


7637
exponential function interpolation.

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data type: Byte type
Data range: 1 - number of controlled axes

156
APPENDIX 6

Set the sequence number of the rotary axis which is applied the
exponential function interpolation.

Data number Data

The amount of division (span value) of the linear


7685 axis in the exponential function interpolation.

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data type: 2 word type
Data unit:

Setting unit
Remarks
IS-A IS-B

mm system machine 0.01 0.001 mm

inch system machine 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range 0 - 99999999

Set the amount of division along the linear axis which is applied the
exponential function interpolation when parameter CBK (Data No. 7610) = 1.

4.30 Parameters Related to Index Table Indexing Function

Data number Data

7602 IDDP IINC IG90 IREL IABS IDX

//7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 //0 (Bit)

Data format: Bit type


IDX Indexing sequence of the index table
0: A type
1: B type
IABS Setup whether absolute coordinate values of the indexing axis of the
index table and their indication are rounded off in 360°.
0: Not execute processing to round off in 360°.
Namely, when commanding; G90 B720. from the position of 0°, the
indexing axis of the index table will turn by 720° (2 times
revolution), and the absolute coordinate values become 720°.
After that, when commanding; G90 B0., it will turn in opposite
direction by 720° (2 times rotation) and the absolute coordinate
value becomes 0°.
1: Execute processing to round off in 360°.
When commanding; G90 B400. from the position of 0°, the indexing
axis of the index table will be determined positioning at 40°.
However, when this parameter is set to 1, the indexing axis of
the index table will not turn more than one time. In addition,
the motion will not be executed even commanded; G90 B720., from
the position of 0°.

157
APPENDIX 6

IREL Processing to round off the indicated relative coordinate values of


the indexing axis of the index table in 360° is:
0: Not executed.
1: Executed.
IG90 Indexing commands of the index table are:
0: Regarded as the absolute/incremental commands according to
G90G91 modes.
1: Regarded always as the absolute command.
IINC When an M code to command the rotation in the negative direction is
not set and it is set that the absolute coordinate value is rounded
off, the rotating direction on the G90 mode is:
0: Not set
1: Set
as a short path rotation.
IDDP Selection of the decimal point input system for the indexing axis of
the index table.
0: Conventional system Bl: = 0.001 deg (IS-B)
1: Electric calculator system Bl: = 1.000 deg (IS-B)
When the parameter DPI (No. 2400) = 1, the electric calculator
system will be selected independently of this parameter.

Data number Data

7631 Index table control axis No.

Data format: Byte type


Set which number is the control axis for the index table.
0: 4th axis
1 - 5: Control axis No. : 11 series
1 - 4: Control axis No. : 10 series

Data number Data

7632 M code for rotation command in the negative direction

Data format: Byte type


0: M code to set the rotating direction of the index table in minus
direction is not used. The rotating direction is set in
accordance with commands and parameter previously described.
1 - 127: The rotating direction is always in the positive direction and
will be changed in minus direction only when the M code set here
is specified in the same block as the indexing command of the
index table. In this case, the parameter ABS (No. 7602) must be
set to "1".
Explanations of the incremental command when an M code
(parameter No. 7632) to rotate the index table in the negative
direction is provided:
When the rotating direction of the index table is executed in
minus rotation with the incremental command, it must be allowed
to turn in backward with the M code.

158
APPENDIX 6

B90.
(Example)
Command as G91 B-90. M15;

B-90. M15;

If commanded as G91 B-90.;, it will


turn in forward and move toward the
point to be obtained by the
incremental command.
In addition, if commanded as G91
B90. M15;, it will move toward the
point to be obtained by the
incremental command in the reverse
direction.

(Note) M O O i s internally processed by an NC, however, both MF and M codes


are sent to the machine side. Therefore, return FIN to the NC.

Data number Data

7682 Indexing least angle of the index table

Data format: 2 words type


Data unit: 0.01 deg (IS-A)
0.001 deg (IS-B)
Data range: 0 - 360000
If 0, commands can be issued independently of the least angle.
When the move amount is other than multiple integral of the
set value, values commanded by coordinate system setting (G92)
or value of the parameter for work zero offset are not
multiple integral of this parameter value, it causes an SP
alarm. (No. 198)

(Note) The move amount and rotating direction for the indexing axis of the
index table are different depending on parameter setting, in spite
of the same commands. When commands which are inconsistent with
parameter setting were issued, it causes an SP alarm. (No. 199)

4.31 Parameters Related to High Speed Operation

Data number Data

7607 RPD

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Setting entry
Data format: Bit type
RPD: When data is loaded newly by G10.3L1 command with high speed
machining, if the data of the specified number already exists,
0: an alarm is generated.
1: former data is erased and replaced with new data.

159
APPENDIX 6

Data number Data

7635 Number of axes specified in 1 block during


high-speed remote buffer mode.

Parameter entry (11M/12M)


Data format: Byte type
Data range: 1-5

Set the number of controlled axes for which high speed remote buffer
operation is performed.
The high speed remote buffer operation is performed from the 1st controlled
axis to the nth controlled axis which is set by this parameter.

Data number Data

7651 Allowance for interference check in block re-start (d)

Parameter input
Data format: Word type
Data unit

Increment system IS-A IS-B Unit

Metric input 0.01 0.001 mm

Inch input 0.001 0.0001 inch

Data range: 0 to 32767

4.32 Parameters Related to Sequence Number Comparison and Stop

Data number Data

7681 Sequence number for comparison and stop

Setting entry
Data format: Word type
Data range: 1 to 9999

Set the sequence number where the operation is to be stopped.

4.33 Parameters Related to Manual Handle Feed

Data number Data

Sequence number of manual handles to be used


7701
for manual handle feed on each axis

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type
Data unit:
Data range: 1 to 3

160 -
APPENDIX 6

For example, when the controlled axes are X, Y, Z, A and B and the manual
handle feed of each axis is performed using the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 2nd and 3rd
manual handles, respectively, set as follows:

7701 X + 1
Y + 2
Z -* 3
A ■> 2
B + 3

4.34 Parameters Related to Synchronous/lndependent Operation

Data number Data

M code to change from synchronous control to


independent control

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte
Data range: 0-99

This parameter specifies an M code which changes synchronous control to


independent control.

Data number Data

7702 Master axis number in synchronous control

Parameter entry
Data format: Byte axis type

When the synchronous control is performed by synchronous control selection


signal SYNC1, SYNC2, SYNC3, SYNC4, ..., this parameter specified an opposite
axis with which the synchronous control is performed:

(Example) Assume the configuration of the controlled axes is as follows:


1st axis - X axis
2nd axis - Z axis
3rd axis - C axis
4th axis - Y axis

When Y axis is synchronously controlled with X axis by


synchronous control selection signal SYNC4, set parameters as
follows
X axis to 0
Z axis to 0
C axis to 0
Y axis to 1

161
APPENDIX 6

4.35 Parameters Related to Service

Data number Data

8000 RPA NPA PWE

#7 #6 #5 it 4 if 3 it 2 #1 #0 (Bit)
Setting entry
Data format: Bit type
PWE The tape entry or MDI entry of the parameters (parameters written as
parameter entry) which cannot be set by the setting entry is
0: Forbidden
1: Not forbidden
NPA When an alarm arises, the CRT screen is
0: Automatically changed to the screen indicating the alarm message
1: Not changed automatically to the screen indicating the alarm
message
RPA When the parameter PWE is 1 (when the parameter entry is admitted),
an alarm is
0: Indicated
1: Not indicated

Note) For safety, the above parameter is set to 0 when the power to the NC
is cut off. However, by setting the parameter NCS at data No. 8010
to 1, it is possible to hold this parameter even when the power to
the NC is cut off.

Data number Data

8010 NCS

#7 it 6 it 5 #4 it 3 it 2 it 1 it 0 (Bit)
Parameter entry
Data format: Bit type
NCS When the power to the NC is cut off, the parameter at data No. 8000
is
0: Set to 0
1: Maintained

162
APPENDIX 7

A P P E N D IX 7 C O D E U S E D IN P R O G R A M

ISO code EIA code


Meaning
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Character 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 o o o 0 o o Numeral 0
1 o o o o o 1 o o Numeral 1
2 o o o o o 2 » o Numeral 2
3 o o ° o o 3 o o O o Numeral 3
4 o o o 0 o 4 0 o Numeral 4
5 o o ° o o 5 o <* o o Numeral 5
6 o o ° o o 6 o « o o Numeral 6
7 o o o ° o o o 7 o o o Numeral 7
8 o o o o o 8 o o Numeral 8
9 o o o 0 o 9 o o o o Numeral 9
A o o o a o o « o Address A
o b o Address B

jo o
B o o
C o o o o o c o u ° o o Address C
D o o d o O! o Address D
E o o ° o o e o o o O o o Address E
F o o o o o f o o o o o o Adcfress F
G o ° o io o g o o o o o o Address G
H o o o h o o o Address H
I o o o o o i o o o o o o Address 1
J o o o 0 o u __________ o o ° o Address J
K o o o o o k o o ° o Address K
L o o o 0 o 1 o o o o Address L
M o o « o o m o o » o Address M
N o o o o o n o O o o Address N
0 o o o 0 o o o o o ° o o Address 0
P o o 0 p __ o « o o o Address P
Q o o o « o q o o o Address Q
R o o o o r o o « o Address R
S o o ° o o s o o o o Address S
T o o o 0 o t o o o o Address T
u o o 0 o o u o o o Address U
V o o O o o V o O o o Address V
w o o o ° o o o w o O o o Address W
X o o o o o X o o » o o o Address X
Y o o o 0 o y o o o 0 Address Y
Z o o o ° o z o o ° o Address Z
DEL o o o o o » o o o Del O o o o « o o o X Delete (cancel an error punch).
X Not punched. Can not be used in
NUL ° Blank »
significant section in EIA code.
BS o o 0 BS o o ° o * Back space
HT o » o Tab o o o ° o o ' * Tabulator
LF or NL o ° o CR or EOB o ° End o f block
CR o o ° o o — * Carriage return
SP o o o SP o o * Space
% o o 0 o o ER o o o o Absolute rewind stop
( o o o (2 —4 -5 ) o o ° o Control out (a comment is started)
) o o o ° o (2 -4 -7 ) o o o Control in (the end of a comment)
+ o o ° o o + o o o 7 Positive sign
o o o o - o o Negative sign
n v- OJOTl
/ o o o 0 o o o / o o o o Optional block skip
o o o o o o o o o o Period (A decimal point)
# o o o o o ? Sharp
$ o o o * Dollar sign
& o o o o o & o o o 7 Ampersand
* o o o o o * Apostrophe
* o o o o o 7 Asterisk
, o o o o o , o o o 0 o o 7 Comma
; o o o o 0 o o * Semicolon
< o o o o o * Left angle bracket
= o o o o o o o 7 Equal
> o o o o ° o o * Right angle bracket
? o o o *> o o o 7 Question mark
@ o o o 7 Commercial at mark
o o o « Quotation
o o o 0 0 o 0 7 Left brace
o o o o ° o o 7 Right brace

163
APPENDIX 7

(Note 1) *: When read in the comment zone, the codes are read into
memory. When read in the significant data zone, the codes
are ignored.
(Note 2) x: Always ignored.
(Note 3) Codes with mark ? is ignored in the significant information
zone before a program number. These codes are stored in part
program memory when they exist in the significant information
zone other than above or in the comment rection. However
when a custom macro option is equipped, the following codes
are not ignored in the significant information zone before a
program number.
#, &, *, =, (and) in ISO code;
Codes set by parameters in EIA code;
(Note 4) Codes not in this table are ignored if their parity is
correct.
(Note 5) Codes with incorrect parity cause the TH alarm. But they are
ignored without generating the TH alarm when they are in the
comment zone.
(Note 6) A character with all eight holes punched does not generate TH
alarm even in EIA code.

164
APPENDIX 8

A PP EN D IX 8

L IS T O F IN T E R N A L C O D ES O F KANJI AND H IR A G A N A

I n t e r n a l code (h e x a d e c im a l 4 d i g i t s )

( 1 /5 )

T h 642 1 ¿b 6422 tl 7 02E & 7035 ta 7037


m 7045 « 7042
< V* 6423 64 24 Jàl 7 0 4A te 7 0 4C s 704F
s 705 5 » 705B n 7 0 5C îâ 7063 a 7068
— 706C № 7075 SI 7 0 7A te 7 12 2 n 7 12 3
O ■7 6425 5 6426 7 12 6 3 7 13F

X i 642 7 L 64 28 7 14 6 & 7 15 4 & 715B


n 7 15F rS 7 16 8 £ 7 17 3 » 7 16F
T H 6429 ii 6 4 2A H 7 1 7A ft 7 17B * 7 17C
a 7 17D E 7 1 7E » 722 1 91 722 3 K 722B
ffi 722F S 7230 £ 72 39
tr 64 2B t< 64 2C T 7 2 3C it 7 2 3D 15 72 3E
w 723F m 724 1 Jra 7243 7244 W 7 2 4A
« 72 4C № 7254 s 7255 7259 if 725D
ä 726 1 go 72 68 ét 7271 K 7272 D 727 3
» 72 7E « 7323 là 7328 № 73 2B « 7 3 2C
fl- 7330 8£ 7335 R 7 3 3A £ 734 6 te 734 8
« 7 3 4A tt 7 3 4B ft 735 1 fl 7354 RI 735 6
* 7358 » 7 3 5D 9)1 7364 ë 7368 « 74 2C
74 30 % 74 39 K 74 41 SS 7 4 4A S 745 1
M 7456 M 74 58 * 7 4 5E II 7 4 6A HI 7248
w 7449 * 7453 7326 «I 7 3 4E 19 735B
Ë 7446 ft 7 4 5D
* è 642D r 64 2E SI 746F S 7470 5 747 1
îF 747 3 7474 R 7 47B M 747C 81 752 1
» 7522 7524 HL 7 5 2C K 7 5 2D îâ 752F
«n 7530 75 3B £ 735F » 755 1 $ 7552
i£ 7555 <* 7559 & 75 5E TF 756 1 J* 7565
5E 756 6 & 75 69 IB 7 5 6C 3? 756E fê 7577
№ 762 1 * 7626 « 7 6 2D $4 762F te 7635
M 7648 ffi 7 6 4A 765 1 fl 7652 g 7658
m 7 6 5A a 766 1 * 7662 I* 7576 S 754 1
& 756B

165
APPENDIX 8

(2/5)

9 < 642F <- 6430 7668 766B


E i§ 7671
n 7675 ft 7676 № 7679 ts 7721 ft 77 2B
s? 7732
*r it 643 1 if 6432 7738 7739
№ tx 52 7 73F
& 774 1 S 7742 * 774F g 7750 775 1
&

ft 7757 g 7 7 5A fir 7765 7767 7768


7\ 7 7 6A 1» 7 7 6B № 776F & 782 1 ft 7822
Bf 7826 7 8 2A a 78 2B £ 7833 7C 7835
DR 7836 £ 7839 « 7 8 3A B 783B ft 78 3D
3 7840 SI 7842
o 6433 —
6434 7844 ft 7846
- 49 & 7 8 4C
E 785F \k 7865 13 786C & 78 6D X 7872
1? 7 8 7C □ 7 8 7D ft 7 8 7E 71 7926 X 7929
7847 B 7 8 4A m 7866 » 786E ft 7933
15 7 9 2A tu 792D « 79 35 JE 7939 ft 793B
« 7 9 3D m 7942 79 45 55 7953 tf 7954
ft 7 9 5D № 795F * 7960 ¡5 7962 * 7966
* 7967 796F .tfc.
a 7970 & 7975 ii 797E
ts 7 A2 C » 7 8 7A ft 7 A2 E

•r ? 6435 6436 a 7 A3 8 ft 7 A3 9 £ 7A4 2


» 7A4 6 * 7 A4 7 ft 7A 4E ft 7 A5 1 ft 7 A5 9
a 7 A5 F 7 A6 0 Rt 7A6 2 № 7 A 6.E M 7 A6 F
* 7A 7 6 ft 7B2 8 * 7B3 2 LU 7B3 3 it 7B3 6
7B 3A # 7B3B a 7B4 4 ft 7 A3 F
y L 6437 t 6438 ft 7B4 5 « 7B4 8 E 7B4D
№ 7B4F s? 7B5 1 7B5 2 .f. 7B5 7 ts 7B5 8
it 7B5F & 7B6 5 iA 7B6B ft 7B6E * 7371
ft 7B7 5 7B7 6 ftt 7B77 ft 7B7D ft 7B7E
& 7C2 1 & 7C2 3 7C2 8 ¥ 7C2A g 7C2B
7C3 0 7C3 4 ft 7C 3A £ 7C3C R 7C4 1
£ 7C4 2 ¥ 7C4C St 7C4D 7C5 0 * 7C5 4
* 7C5 6 ft 7C5A * 7C6 1 SI 7C6 5 7C6 7
JR 7C6 8 * 7C6A ft 7C6C ft 7C6 F * 7C7 5
n 7C7 7 ft 7C7D fl 7C7E « 7D2 4 ft 7D2A
£ 7D3 8 + 7D3D tt 7D3E ts 7D4 4 s 7D4 5
m 7D5 0 m 7D5 1 i£ 7D5 2 ft 7 D6 0 it 7D6 3

166
APPENDIX 8

(3/5)

X mi 7D6 7 7 D6 8 7D6 9 pfi 7 D6 A & 7 D7 1


BJ 7D7 5 Ff 7D7 8 ft 7D7C ffi 7E2 6 '1' 7E2E
& 7 E 2'F ft 7E30 7E3A m 7E4 3 & 7E4 4
m 7E48 7E 4A ft 7E4F E 7E 5A ft 7E5D
± 7E6 5 #1 7E6A if, 7E6C ■№ 7E6F & 7E7 ?
4* 7E75 m 7E7E 11 7F22 7F2 7 ft 7F29
№ 7F2D it 7F2E g 7F2F 7F34 IS 7F36
m 7F37 a 7F3B iS 7F 3C S 7F3F n 7F4 7
% 7F48 it 7F4A A 7F4D J3 7F4F № 7E2 1
% 7B6 7 № 7B69 3= 7C6 9 a 7C7 9 ft 7E4E
n 7E5C k 7F28
X t 6439 1* 6 4 3A SI 7 F5 E № 7F64 * 7 F6 5
m 7F 6D ft 7F74 m 7F78 ft 8023 m 7F62
•t ■ti- 64 3B -a: 6 4 3C @i 8029 s£ 802E s 8030
E 8035 Si 8 0 3D if 8044 ffi 8 0 4A E 8050
« 805 1 # 8056 VJ 8 0 5A a 8 05C iff 805E
li 805F Sn 8061 & 80 62 a 8064 ft 8068
•f 8069 8 0 6C m 8075 m 8 0 7B a 8 0 7E
iH 8 12A fill 8 13 0 ** 8 13 3 £ 8 13 4 a 8 0 3A
fi 802D & 8038 a 8053
V •r 6 4 3D •F 6 4 3E *a 8 14 6 s 8 14 7 IQ 8 14F
3R 8 15 0 s 8 15B a 8 1 5C t* 8 15E it 8 16 0
¥ 8 16 1 IS 8 1 6A ft 8 1 6D ft 8 17 6 & 8 17 7
if 8 17D m 8226 III 8227 BP 8228 iS 822E
ft 8230 te 8233 1? 82 38 ft 8 17 5 »1 8 2 2C
£ 4 2 2D » 4 2 3B
* i; 643F t' 6460 8 2 3E * 823F ± 8240
4T 8247 i* 8 2 4E 8250 a 8254 №
M
m* 8256
if 8258 it 8260 It 8265 a 8266 A 8267
m 8268 a 8 2 6A 4 8 2 6E 0? 8272 it 8323
832B # 833 1 £ 8335 £ 8 3 3A S 8 3 3B
;s 8 3 3C № 8347 IS 8 3 4A
* <b 644 1 ft 6442 lit 8 3 4D ft 834E itfc 834F
£ 8356 sc 8357 a 8 359 * 8365 * 8366
& 8 3 6C i£ 8 3 6D ft 83 72 T 8 3 7A a 8427
H 8434 S 8436 « 84 39 10 8 4 3A ¡a 8 4 3E
It 8 3 5A 5S 8425 .a 8 4 3B
6443 o 6444 -7 6445 it 8449 il 8 4 4C

167
APPENDIX 8

(4/5)

r | T 6446 f 6447 8463 ff 846 4 5c 8 4 6A


i£ 8 4 6C IT 84 7B i* 8534 Ss 8 5 3A £ 85 3E
* 854 0 £ 854 1 « 8545 it 8478 IS 8479
8 5 2A ¡3 8 5 2C
h £ 644 8 £ 6449 2 8550 8553 S 855 9
& 8 5 6A 3 8628 m 862C «1 8630 H 863 1
3J 8633 SI 8 6 3B ft 8 64 0 ft 8643 i± 864 8
R 8649 C l 8 6 4C 5? 8 6 4D 865F 8579
£ 8 576
■r if 6 4 4A 8662

— 1- 6 4 4B 867 9 B 8 6 7C A 867E £ 8724


fW
M/ 8 727
A 6 4 4C

* la 6 4 4D 8 72E ft 8 72F

o 6 44E « 8 73B 8 7 3D № 8 7 3C

ii 6 44F II 6450 a 645 1 № 8 74F Pic 875 4


ff 8 755 If 8758 E 8 7 5B 875C 877 2
1? 8 776 * 88 22 55 8 82F a 8834 88 3C
* 8 8 3E K 8 83F 15 8 84F $ 8856 « 884 4
85 8 74B # 8753 « 8 8 3D % 8 8 4« 2 81 884 6
<5 8 8 4C
t 6452 6453 £/ 6454 it 8 866 & 886 9
fit 8 8 6F £ 8873 fll 8877 a 8 879 £ 88 7E
42- 8 9 2C ¥ 89 34 15 8 938 £ 8 9 3D fffl 8941
8 943 oO
D 8 9 4A
7 •«« 6455 »*
•*« 6456 6 457 T' 895 4 It 8955
* 8 9 5B 89 61 ft 8 969 n 897 4 £ 8 9 7A
Si] 8 9 7B a 8 9 7C *3 8 9 7D IS 8 A2 3 8 A 2A
% 8A2C s 8A3 8 HI 8A3 9 ® 8A3 4
A. 6458 -< 6 459 6 4 5A m 8A3B ¥ 8A3F
£ 8A4 2 K 8 A4 7 w 8 A4 C £ 8 A5 1 * 8 A5 2
k 8A5 4 a 8 A5 5 is 8A5 6 *a 8 A5 9 # 8A5B
m 8A4 4
i#- 6 4 5B it 6 45C ir 6 4 5D 8A5D ft 8A62
i* 8A64 № 8A6F n 8A7 1 n . 8A7C 8A 7D
8B2 1 8 B 3A 1 $ 8B40 ft 8B5C te 8A7 3

168
APPENDIX 8

(5/5)

4 6 4 5E 8B6 0 tx 8B6 7 8B8 7


#• £ * 1 8B7C
8B68
; A 6 4 5F 8C2 4 m 8C2 9

A ti 6 460 & 8C3 5

> Jb 646 1 £ 8C3E & 8C3F 8C4 0 S 8C4 7


m 8C4C
•5 L 6462 ft 8C5 7 * 8 C5A B 8 C5C 8C6 1
H 8C64 n 8C6 7
•T «> 6463 6 464 to 8C7 3 K 8C7 5

JX 1* 64 65 64 66 ft 8C7D 8D2D A 8 D3 3

a 64 67 1 6 468 * 8D3E s 8 D4 6 a 8 D4 9

» 8D4D iS 8 D4 F m 8D5 1 5? 8D5 7 n 8D5E

8 D3 F ? 8D3D

7 6469 & 8D6D SI 8D70 £ 8 D7 7 m 8D6E

9 9 6 4 6A 8D78 a 8D7D £ 8E2 2 a 8E2 5


ip 8E28 £ 8E29 ■6 8E2C 7 8E3B Pi • 8E3E
a 8E4 9 ft 8E4C tt 8E4F ft 8E5 8 il 8E4E
a 8E50 ft 8E4 1
/u a 6 4 6B » 8E60

u il 6 4 6C * 8E6 1 9i 8E6 3 8E6 4 il 8E69


w 8E7 3 it 8E74 a 8 E 7D A 8F22
n •6 6 4 6D 8F29 & 8F3F 1
M6i. 8F4 0

7 •» 6 4 6E h 6 4 6F fo 8F42 IS 8F43 # 8F48

8F44

i 6 472 X, 6473

- 6F4 0 / 6 F4 1 t 6 F4 2 V 6 F4 3 - 6F44
82-5-* / 6F45 i 6F46 \ 6F47 O 6F48 O 6F4 9
S p e c iiil n 6 13 7 V 6 F5 0 w 6 F5 1 W 7 6 F5 2 w w 6 F5 3
symbols s~\ 6 F 4A 6 F4 B ■ 6 F4 C
O

- 169 -
APPENDIX 9

A PPEN D IX 9 G CO D E T A B L E

1) Lathe (10T/11T/12T) Table 1. List of G codes (1/2)

G code system (Note)


A Group Function
B C
r GOO r GOO rG00 Positioning
f G01 r G01 rG01 Linear interpolation
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
GO 7 G07 G07 Hypotherical axis interpolation
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
00
G10 G10 G10 Data setting
G10.1 G10.1 G10.1 PMC data setting
Gil Gil Gil Data setting mode cancel
XpYp plane selection XP: X axis or its
G17 G17 G17
parallel axis
r---------- r . r------ ZpXp plane selection Yp: X axis or its
G18 G18 G18 02
parallel axis
YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its
G19 G19 G19
parallel axis
G20 G20 G70 Inch input
06
G21 G21 G71 Metric input
r G22 r G22 ^G22 Stored stroke check on
04
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check off
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
18
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference point return check
G28 G28 G28 Reference point return
G29 G29 G29 00 Return from reference point
G30 G30 G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
G34 G34 G34 Variable lead thread cutting
G35 G35 G35 01 Circular thread cutting CW
Circular thread cutting CCW or automatic
G36 G36 G 36
tool compensation (X axis)
G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool compensation (z axis)
G37.1 G37.1 G37.1 Automatic tool compensation #1
00
G37.2 G37.2 G37.2 Automatic tool compensation #2
G37.3 G37.3 G37.3 Automatic tool compensation #3
r_G40 r G 40 ^040 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation right
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation left
Work coordinates change/maximum spindle
G50 G92 G92
speed setting
f G50.1 r G50.1 rG50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
17
G51.1 G51.1 G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system selection
r G54 rG54 rG54 Work coordinate system 1 selection
G55 G55 G55 Work coordinate system 2 selection
G56 G56 G56 Work coordinate system 3 selection
14
G57 G57 G57 Work coordinate system 4 selection
G58 G58 G58 Work coordinate system 5 selection
G59 G59 G59 Work coordinate system 6 selection

170
APPENDIX 9

Table 1. List of G codes (2/2)

G code system (Note) ------ 1


Group Function
A B C
G61 G61 G61 Exact stop made
G62 G62 G62 15 Automatic corner override
G64 G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 13 Macro modal call B
r G67 r G67 rG67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 G68 G68 Mirror image for double turrets on
11
G69 G69 G69 Mirror image for double turrets cancel
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 Peck dirlling in Z axis
G75 G75 G77 Grooving in X axis
G76 G76 G78 Threading cycle
r G80 ^~G80 nC8C> Canned cycle for drilling cancel
G81 G81 G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring
G82 G82 G82 Drilling cycle, counter boring
G83 G83 G83 Peck drilling cycle
G83.1 G83.1 G83.1 Peck drilling cycle
G84 G84 G84 Tapping cycle
G84.1 G84.1 G84.1 09 Counter tapping cycle
G85 G85 G85 Boring cycle
G86 G86 G86 Boring cycle
G86.1 G86.1 G86.1 Fine boring cycle
G87 G87 G87 Back boring cycle
G88 G88 G88 Boring cycle
G89 G89 G89 Boring cycle
G90 G77 G20 Cutting cycle A
G92 G78 G21 01 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 Cutting cycle B
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
12
r_G97 r_G97 rG97 Constant surface speed control
y G98 r G94 rG94 Feed per minute
05
y G99 ' G95 rG95 Feed per revolution
- ^G9Ü rG90 Absolute command
03
- ^G9l rG91 Incremental command
- ^G98 rG98 Canned cycle initial level return
10
- G99 G99 Canned cycle R point level return

171
APPENDIX 9

2) Lathe (11TT)

Table 2. ■List of G codes (1/2)

G code system (Note)


Group Function
A B C
01 y GOO rSïïô Positioning
r G01 r GÔÏ rG01 Linear interpolation
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW
00 G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G07 G07 G07 Hypotherical axis interpolation (11TT-A only)
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 G10 Data setting
G10. 1 G10. 1 G10.1 PC data setting
Gil Gil Gil Data setting mode cancel
16 G17 G17 G17 XY plane selection
r G18 r GÎ8 ^G18 ZX plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YZ plane selection
06 G20 G20 G70 Inch input
G21 G21 G71 Metric input
04 r G22 r G22 rG22 Stored stroke check on
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check off
00 G27 G27 G27 Reference point return check
G28 G28 G28 Reference point return
G29 G29 G29 Return from reference point
G30 G30 G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
01 G32 G33 G33 Thread cutting
G34 G34 G34 Variable lead thread cutting
G35 G35 G35 Circular thread cutting CW (11TT-A only)
G36 G36 G36 Circular thread cutting CCW (11TT-A only) or
automatic tool compensation (X axis)
00 G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool compensation or automatic tool
compensation (Zaxis)
G37.1 G37.1 G37.1 Automatic tool compensation //1
G37.2 G37.2 G37.2 Automatic tool compensation if 2
G37.3 G37.3 G37.3 Automatic tool compensation #3
07 r G40 r G40 rG40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 Tool nose radius compensation right
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation left
G50 G92 G92 Work coordinates change/maximum spindle speed
setting
00 G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system selection
15 G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode
y G64 r G64 k’G64 Cutting mode
00 G65 G65 G65 Macro call
12 G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66. 1 Macro modal call B
r G67 röff ^G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
13 G68 G68 G68 Balance cut mode (11TT-A only)
v G69 rC69 rG69 Balance cut mode cancel (11TT-A only)
00 G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 Pattern repeating
G74 G74 G76 Peck drilling Z axis
G75 G75 G77 Grooving in X axis
G76 G76 G 78 Threading cycle

172
APPENDIX 9

Table 2. List of G codes (2/2)

G code system (Note)


Group Function
A B C

01 G90 G77 G20 Cutting cycle A


G92 G78 G21 Thread cutting cycle
G94 G79 G24 Cutting cycle B
02 G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
r G97 r~G97 r~G97 Constant surface speed control
05 r G98 ' G94 ^”(394 Feed per minute
r G99 r G95 r^G95 Feed per revolution
03 r_G90 r G90 Absolute command
^ G91 r_G91 Incremental command

173
APPENDIX 9

3) Machining Center (10M/11M/12M)

Table 3. List of G codes (1/2)

G code Group Function


w GOO Positioning
"""g o I Linear interpolation
G02 Circular/Helical interpolation CW
G03 ' 01 Circular/Helical interpolation CCW
G02.1 Circular threading B CW
G03.1 Circular threading B CCW
G02.3 Exponential function interpolation CW
G03.3 Exponential function interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell
GO 5 High speed remote buffer operation
G05.1 Multi buffer
GO 7 Hybothetical axis interpolation
G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation
G09 Exact stop
00
G10 Data setting
G10.1 PC data setting
G10.3 High speed machining registration start
Gil Data setting mode cancel
G11.3 High speed machining registration end
G12.1 Polar coordinate interpolation mode
25
G13.1 Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
r G15 Polar coordinates command cancel
18
G16 Polar coordinates command
^GT7 XpYp plane Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
r G18 02 ZpXp plane Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 Inch input
06
G21 Metric input
^ G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G27 Reference point return check
G28 Reference point return
G29 Return from reference point
G30 Return to 2nd, 3rd, 4th reference point
00
G31 Skip function
G31.1 Multi-step skip function 1
G31.2 Multi-step skip function 2
G31.3 Multi-step skip function 3
G33 01 Thread cutting
G37 Tool length automatic measurement
G38 00 Cutter radius compensation vector change
G39 Cutter radius compensation corner rounding
^ G40 Cutter radius compensation cancel/3 dimensional tool
07 compensation cancel
G41 Cutter radius compensation left 1/3 dimensional tool
compensation
G42 Cutter radius compensation right
G43 Tool length compensation +
08
G44 Tool length compensation -
G45 Tool offset increase
G46 Tool offset decrease
00
G47 Tool offset double increase
G48 Tool offset double decrease
w G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel

174
APPENDIX 9

Table 3. List of G codes (2/2)

G code Group Function


•^^50 Scaling cancel
11
G51 Scaling
w G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
19
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 Machine coordinate system selection
w G54 Work coordinate system 1 selection
G54.1 Additional work coordinate system selection
G55 Work coordinate system 2 selection
G56 Work coordinate system 3 selection
12
G57 Work coordinates system 4 selection
G58 Work coordinate system 5 selection
G59 Work coordinate system 6 selection
G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override mode
13
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G65.3 Call of high speed machining program
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 14 Macro modal call B
^G67 Macro modal call A/B cancel
G68 Coordinate system rotation
16
w G69 Coordinate system rotation cancel
G73 Peck drilling cycle
G74 Counter tapping cycle
G76 Fine boring cycle
w G80 Canned cycle cancel/external operation function cancel
G81 Drilling cycle, spot boring/external operation
G82 Drilling cycle, counter boring
G83 09 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
w G90 Absolute command
03
r_G91 Incremental command
G92 00 Work coordinates change/Maximum spindle speed setting
G93 Inverse time feed
r G94 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolution
G96 Constant surface speed control
17
^G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
w G98 Canned cycle initial level return
10
G99 Canned cycle R point level return

175
APPENDIX 9

(Note .1) The G codes marked with V are initial G codes in each group.
That is, these G codes are set when the power is turned on or when
the reset button is pressed. For G22 and G23, G22 is selected
when the power is turned on. After reset, G22 or G23 (the one
effective before resetting) is set.
For GOO and G01, G94 and G95, or G90 and G91, the value selected
for the initial G codes is specified by parameter G01, G94, G90
(Data No. 2401).
For G20 and G21, the one in effect before the power was cut or the
rest button was pressed is selected.
(Note 2) The G codes in the group 00 are not modal. They are effective
only in the block in which they are specified.
(Note 3) An alarm occurs when a G code not listed in the above table is
specified or when an optional G code not defined in the controller
is specified (PS010).
(Note 4) A number of G codes can be specified in a block if they do not
belong to the same group. When a number of G codes of the same
group are specified, the G code specified last is effective.

176
APPENDIX 10

A PPEN D IX 10 E R R O R CO D E T A B L E

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 003 TOO MANY DIGITS Data exceeding the allowable


number of digits was input.
(See the maximum command value)

PS 006 ILLEGAL USE OF NEGATIVE Sign was specified at an


VALUE address where no sign is
allowable; or two signs
were specified.

PS 007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL A decimal point was


POINT specified at an address where
no decimal point is
allowable; or two decimal
points were specified.

PS 010 IMPROPER G-CODE An illegal G code is specified.


This alarm also occurs if a G
code corresponding to a
non-additional option was
specified.

PS Oil IMPROPER NC-ADDRESS An illegal address was


specified.

PS 012 INVALID BREAK POINT OF A word delimiter is in error.


WORD

PS 013 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NO. Address 0 or N is specified at


POSITION an illegal position (like the
position after a macro
statement).

PS 014 ILLEGAL PROGRAM NO. Address O or N is not followed


FORMAT by a number (numeral).

PS 015 TOO MANU WORDS IN ONE the number of words in a block


BLOCK exceeds the allowable range.

PS 016 EOB NOT FOUND EOB (End of Block) code is


missing at the end of a program
which was input in the MDI
mode.

PS 017 ILLEGAL MODE FOR GOTO statement or WHITE-DO


GOTO/WHITE/DO statement is contained in an
MDI or tape mode main program.

T: CNC far the lathe (10T, 11T, 11TT, 12T)


M: CNC far the machining center (10M, 11M, 12M)
Note 1) PS xxx shows a program/setting alarm generated in foreground. A
background alarm number corresponding to PS xxx is displayed as BG
xxx.
Similarly, a background alarm corresponding to SR xxx is also
displayed as BG xxx.
177
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 058 S-COMMAND OUT OF RANGE The specified spindle speed


exceeded the maximum
revolutions (data No. 5619) of
the spindle motor (when data
No. 5601 parameter SAL is 1).

PS 060 SEQUENCE NUMBER NOT The specified sequence number


FOUND was not found in the sequence
number search. The sequence
number was not found at the
jump destination specified by
GOTO n or M99Pn.

PS 061 NO P, Q COMMAND AT Neither P nor Q is specified in


G70-G72 the canned cycle G70 to G73
blocks for multiple repetitive
cycles.
T
(P: Sequence number at the
cycle start block
Q: Sequence number at the
cylce end block)

PS 062 ILL COMMAND IN G70-G76 . The value commanded by


address D in G71, G72, G73
block is zero or negative
value.
. The value commanded by K, D
in G76 block is zero or
negative value or the value
commanded by A exceeds
T
allowable range (ou<A_120°)
. The value commanded I, K, D
is negative value.
. The value of I is zero though
X is commanded in G74, G75
block or the value of K is
zero though Z is commanded in
G74, G75 block.

PS 063 P, Q BLOCK NOT FOUND P or Q sequence number block


specified in the canned cycle
T
G71, G72, G73 blocks is not
found.

PS 065 ILL COMMAND IN P-BLOCK G code GOO or G01 of group 01


in the P sequence number block
specified in the canned cycle
G70, G71, G72 blocks is not
commanded.

178
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 066 ILL COMMAND IN PROGRAM A G code in group 01 other than


GOO, G01, G02, and G03, a
one-shot G code other than G04,
or G65, G66, G67, M98, or M99 T
is specified in the sequence
number blocks designated by P
and Q of G70, G71 and G72.

PS 067 G70-G73 AT FORBIDDEN Canned cycles G70, G71, G72,


MODE and G73 are specified in a mode T
other than the memory mode.

PS 069 ILL COMMAND IN Q-BLOCK Chamfering or corner R is


specified in a Q sequence
T
number block specified in the
canned cycle G70 to G73.

PS 076 PROGRAM NOT FOUND The program having the program


number called by M98, G65, G66,
G66.1, G/M/T codes is not
found.

PS 077 PROGRAM IN USE A program being edited in the


background was called for
execution in the foreground.

PS 090 DUPLICATE NC, MACRO NC statement and macro


STATEMENT statement were specified in the
same block.

PS 091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD A subprogram call command was


specified twice or more in the
same block.

PS 092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL A macro call command was


WORD specified twice or more in the
same block.

PS 093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than 0, N, P,


and L is specified in the same
block as M99 under the macro
modal call condition (G67).

PS 094 USE "G" AS ARGUMENT Address G serves as macro


argument.

PS 095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT Arguments were specified in


more than 11 sets in the custom
macro argument specification
II.

179
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL Call mode cancel (G67) was


CALL specified in other than the
macro modal call mode (G66).

PS 110 OVERFLOW: INTEGER An integer1exceed


(-2 )-(2 -1) in arithmetic
process.

PS 111 OVERFLOW: FLOATING Arithmetic process exceeded a


binary floating point range.

PS 112 ZERO DIVIDE Division is specified with a


zero divisor (Custom macro).

PS 114 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF An illegal variable number is


RANGE specified (Custom macro).

PS 115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE A variable employable on the


left member side of an
expression is employed in the
right member side of the
expression (Custom macro).

PS 116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE A variable employable on the


right member side of an
expression is employed on the
right member side of the
expression (Custom macro).

PS 118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Multiplicity of brackets


exceeds the allowable range
(Custom macro).

PS 119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF An argument of a function


RANGE exceeded the allowable range
(Custom macro).

PS 121 TO MANY SUB, MACRO The total of multiplicity of


NESTING subprogram calls and macro
calls exceeded the allowable
range.

PS 122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Multiplicity of macro calls


exceeded the allowable range
(Custom macro).

PS 123 MISSING END STATEMENT END command corresponding to DO


command is missing (Custom
macro).

PS 124 MISSING DO STATEMENT DO command corresponding to END


command is missing (Custom
macro).

180
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 125 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION Expression format is illegal.


FORMAT

PS 126 ILLEGAL LOOP NO. DO and END No. exceeded the


allowable range.

PS 128 SEQUENCE NO. OUT OF Sequence number is other than


RANGE 1 - 9999.

PS 131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of open brackets "("


is smaller than the number of
close brackets ")" (Custom
macro).

PS 132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of close brackets


")" is smaller than the number
of open brackets "(" (Custom
macro).

PS 133 MISSING "=" Command "=" is missing (Custom


macro).

PS 134 MISSING Command "/" is missing (Custom


macro).

PS 135 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT Macro statement format is in


ERROR error (Custom macro).

PS 136 DFA STATEMENT FORMAT Macro DFA statement format is


ERROR in error (Custom macro).

PS 137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT Macro IF statement format is in


ERROR error (Custom macro).

PS 138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT Macro WHILE statement format is


ERROR in error (Custom macro).

PS 139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT Macro SETVN statement format is


ERROR in error (Custom macro).

PS 141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN An illegal character is


VAR. NAME employed as the variable name
in SETVN statement (Custom
macro).

PS 142 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME Variable name is too long in


SETVN statement (Custom macro).

PS 143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT BPRNT or DPRNT statement format


FORMAT ERROR is in error.

PS 144 G10 FORMAT ERROR There is an error in the G10


format.

181
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 145 F10.1 TIME OUT Response time of the PC to the


G10.1 command is out.

PS 146 G 10.1 FORMAT ERROR There is an error in the G10.1


format.

PS 180 ALL PARALLEL AXES IN All parallel axes at the same


PARKING address are parking. (Parking
signal is turned on)

PS 181 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED After turning on the power


supply, the move command was
specified for an axes where the
zero return had not yet been
finished. (Automatic
operation)

PS 182 CIRCLE OUT IN RAPID F0 (rapid traverse in FI digit


feed or inverse feed) was
specified in the circular mode
(G02/G03).

PS 183 TOO MANY SIMULTANEOUS A move command was specified


CONTROL AXES for axes exceeding the
simultaneously controllable
axes.

PS 184 TOO LARGE DISTANCE The move amount exceeded the


maximum command value as a
result of compensation and
others.

PS 185 ZERO RETURN CHECK (G27) The axis, specified by G27


ERROR (zero return check), does not
return to zero point yet.

PS 186 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT A plane select command is in


error. (Parallel axes were
specified simultaneously.)

PS 187 FEED ZERO (COMMAND) Cutting feedrate command (F


code) was 0.

PS 188 FEED ZERO (DRY RUN) Parameter set value was 0 at


maximum feedrate or dry run
rate.

PS 191 OVER TOLERANCE OF RADIUS An arc, where the difference of


radius values at start point
and end point is larger than
the parameter set value, was
specified. (Parameter 2410)

182 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 192 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND In variable lead thread


(G34) cutting, the lead
increase/decrease amount given
by address K is exceeding the
maximum command value; or the
lead is commanded with minus
value or the value exceeding
the maximum lead.

PS 194 ZERO RETURN END NOT ON The axis specified by G28


REF (automatic reference point
return) does not return to the
correct reference point at the
end of positioning.

PS 195 ILLEGAL AXIS SELECTED A P value specified in G96


(G96) block or parameter 5640 value
is in error.

PS 196 ILLEGAL DRILLING AXIS Selection of drilling axis was


SELECT not correctly specified in
canned cycle for drilling.

PS 197 OTHER AXIS ARE COMMANDED The indexing axis of the index
table and other control axes
are commanded at the same time.

PS 198 STROKE THAN MINIMUM ANGLE Values other than multiple


integral of the least angle for
indexing the index table are
commanded.

PS 199 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN On indexing commands for the


INDEXING index table, error commands are
specified.

PS 200 PULSE CODER SYNCHRONOUS Grid position could not be


ERROR obtained because no
one-revolution signal was
applied before leaving
deceleration dog in grid zero
return using a digital position
detector.

PS 201 ILLEGAL LEAD COMMAND A command to change the longer


(G35) axis is specified during thread T
cutting in circular thread.

G02.1/03.1 FORMAT ERROR The commanded arc exceeded the


range where interpolation can M
be made.

- 183 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 213 ILLEGAL USE OF Conditions when polar


G12.1/G13.1 coordinate interpolation is
started or canceled are not
correct.
. G12.1 or G13.1 is commanded
in the mode except for G40
mode.
. There is a mistake in the
selection of a plane.
(Parameter set mistakes/1032,
1033, 1022)

PS 214 ILLEGAL USE OF G-CODE A G code which shall not be


commanded in G12.1 mode is
commanded.

PS 270 OFFSET C START UP CANCEL Cutter compensation is being


BY CIR. started up or cancelled under
the arc mode.

PS 271 CRC: ILLEGAL PLANE Plane is being changed during


offset C.

PS 272 CRC: INTERFERENCE Too much cutting is done on


offset C.

PS 299 CRC: NO SOLUTION There is no intersection point


in offset C.

PS 300 ILLEGAL ADDRESS An illegal address was


specified when loading the
parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape.

PS 301 MISSING ADDRESS No address was specified when


loading the parameters or pitch
error compensation data from a
tape.

PS 302 ILLEGAL DATA NUMBER A specified data number was in


error when loading the
parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape.

PS 303 ILLEGAL AXIS NUMBER A specified axis number was in


error when loading the
parameters from a tape.

PS 304 TOO MANY DIGITS The number of digits of data


exceeded the allowable value
when loading the parameters or
pitch error compensation data
from a tape.

184
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 305 DATA OUT OF RANGE A data value exceeded the


allowable value when loading
the parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape.

PS 306 MISSING AXIS NUMBER No axis number was specified


when loading the parameters
requiring the axis
specification from a tape.

PS 307 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS Use of data sign was illegal .


SIGN when loading the parameters or
pitch error compensation data
from a tape.

PS 308 MISSING DATA An address was not followed by


a numeral when loading the
parameters or pitch error
compensation data from a tape.

PS 400 PROGRAM NOT WATCH A tape program does not match a


memory program.

PS 410 G37 IMPROPER AXIS Axis is not specified in the


COMMAND block commanded with the tool
measurement; or, two or more
axes are specified.

PS 411 G37 SPECIFIED WITH D/H A, D or T code is specified in


CODE the same block with the tool
length measurement command.

PS 412 G37 OFFSET NO. D or T code is not commanded


UNASSIGNED before the tool length
measurement command.

PS 413 G37 SPECIFIED WITH A T code is specified in the


T-CODE same block with tool
measurement command.

PS 414 G37 OFFSET NO. T code is not commanded before


UNASSIGNED the tool measurement command.

PS 415 G37 ARRIVAL SGNL NOT In toll measurement command,


ASSERTED the measurement position
arrival signal became "ON"
before reaching the area
specified with the parameter;
or, it did not become "ON" to
the end.

PS 421 SETTING COMMAND ERROR Setting command of the tool


data (G10L70 - G11/G10 L71 -
Gil) is wrong. (Tool offset by
tool number)

185
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 422 NOT FOUND TOOL DATA Pot number, tool length


compensation value, and cutter
compensation value
corresponding to the tool
number, or the commanded tool
number are not set. (Tool
offset by tool number)

PS 426 TOO MANY ADDRESS Two or more I, (J), K, R are


commanded in the same block
commanded with chambering,
corner rounding.
Example) GOIX K R;

PS 427 NOT ONE AXIS MOVE WITH Move command of the block
I ^ R commanded with chamfering,
corner R is not one axis
command.
Example) G10X__Z__K;

PS 428 MISMATCH AXIS WITH I (K) was commanded as X axis


I ^ R (Z axis) command of the block
commanded with chamfering,
corner R.
R01X__I__; G 1 0 Z _ K _ ;

PS 429 MISSING VALUE AT I ^ R The move distance in the block T


commanded with chamfering,
corner R is less than the
chamfering, corner R amount.

MISSING VALUE AT CNR, The block with chamfering, M


CHF corner R is inserted, so the
value exceeds previous moving
command range.

PS 430 CODE ISN'T G10 AFTER The command after the block
I ^ R commanded with chamfering,
corner R is not G01.
Example) N1G01X K ;
N2G00Z__I__;

186 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 431 MISSING MOVE AFTER The direction or move distance


I ^ R of the command of the block T
after the block commanded with
chamfering, corner R is odd.
The command of the next lock is
not correct.

\A ___ ___________A
\ i
\ i
ij i_ __i

MISSING MOVE AFTER The linear or circular M


CNR, CHF interpolation is not commanded
in the block after the block
commanded with chamfering,
corner R.

PS 437 ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP The tool group number exceeds


NUMBER the maximum value.

PS 438 NOT FOUND GROUP AT LIFE Tool data of the group


DATA specified in a machining
program has not been specified.

PS 439 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL TIMES The number of tools


registerable in a group exceeds
the maximum.

PS 440 NOT FOUND T COMMAND No T command is specified in a


tool group setting program.

PS 441 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE H99 command or D99 command has
GROUP been specified when no tool is
used, which belongs to a group.

PS 442 ILLEGAL TO COMMAND AT A T command (belongs to return


M06 destination tool group)
following M06 command in a
machining program does not
match with the group number
currently used.

PS 443 NOT FOUND P, L COMMAND P or L command is missed at the


head of a program which sets a
tool group data.

PS 444 OVER MAXIMUM LIFE GROUP The number of tool group to be


TIMES set exceeds the maximum.

PS 445 ILLEGAL L COMMAND A L command in a program which


sets a tool group data is 0 or
exceeds the allowable maximum
life count.

187
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 446 ILLEGAL H D T COMMAND H, D or T command in a program M


which sets a tool group data
exceeds the maximum value.

ILLEGAL T COMMAND T command exceeds the maximum T


value in the program to set the
tool groups.

PS 447 ILLEGAL TYPE OF TOOL Setting of tool change method M


CHANGE is erroneous.

PS 448 ILLEGAL FORMAT AT LIFE Illegal command is specified in


DATA a program which sets a tool
group data.

PS 449 NO TOOL LIFE DATA A tool group is specified in a


machining program without
setting tool group data.

PS 580 ENCODE ALARM (PSWD & KEY) When a program is read,


(Password)«^ > (Password on
tape) at (Password) > 0. At
the time of encypted tape
punch, (Password) is not set to
not less than 1, not more than
99999999.

PS 581 ENCODE ALARM (PARAMETER) At the time of encrypted tape


punch, a punch code parameter
is EIA specified. When a
program is encrypted or for
secrecy protection, a wrong
command was given.

PS 610 ILLEGAL GU7. 1 AXIS An axis (linear axis) which


cannot perform cylindrical
interpolation is commanded.
More than 2 axes are commanded
in G7.1 block.
When cylindrical interpolation
is canceled, an axis which is
not in the cylindrical
interpolation mode is
commanded.

PS 611 ILLEGAL G-CODE USE A G code which cannot be used


(G07. 1 MODE) in the cylindrical
interpolation mode is
commanded.

PS 891 ILLEGAL COMMAND G05 Command is made in the state M


that G05 cannot be commanded.

188
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PS 895 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN There is an error in the


G02.3/G03.3 setting of the axis (Parameter
No. 7636, 7637) for performing M
the exponential function
interpolation.

PS 896 ILLEGAL FORMAT IN There is an error in the format


G02.3/G03.3 of the exponential function
interpolation. (Addresses I,
M
J, R are not specified or their
values are 0 or the span value
is negative.)

PS 897 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN There is an error in the


G02.3/G03.3 command value of the
exponential function
interpolation. (The command
vlaue which does not fallow for M
the exponential function
interpolation was specified.
For example, the parameter of
the In is negative.)

189 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SR 310 H.S.C. ERROR G10.3, G11.3 or G65.3 is used


erroneously.

SR 311 H.S.C. ERROR There was an impermissible


command during the high-speed
machining.

SR 312 H.S.C. ERROR The address P, Q, L command


value exceeded the allowable
range.

SR 313 H.S.C. ERROR The high-speed machining data


of the called number does not
exist.

SR 314 H.S.C. ERROR The cluster of the called


number does not exist.

SR 315 H.S.C. ERROR The high-speed machining data


of the registered number is
existing.

SR 316 H.S.C. ERROR The memory has no more vacant


areas.

SR 317 H.S.C. ERROR The number of the registered


pieces of the high-speed
machining data exceeded the
limit.

SR 318 H.S.C. ERROR The high-speed machining data


was registered during
background editing.

SR 319 H.S.C. ERROR The high-speed machining data


format is faulty.

SR 320 H.S.C. ERROR A macro interrupt occurred


during the high-speed
machining.

SR 424 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL DATA Number of setting of tool data


exceeds to the maximum
allowable number of setting of
tool data. (Tool offset by
tool number)

SR 590 TH ERROR TH alarm (A character with a


parity error was specified in
the significant information
section.)

SR 591 TV ERROR TV alarm (The number of


characters in one block was not
even.)

190
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SR 592 END OF ERROR EOR (End of Record) was


specified halfway through a
block.

SR 600 PARAMETER OF RESTART There is an error in the


ERROR parameter of program restart.

SR 805 ILLEGAL COMMAND An attempt was made to specify


an illegal command for
puncher/reader interface. A
system error in most cases.

SR 806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH Such a job as cannot be done by


I/O device being selected by
setting was specified.
Example) Heading of a file was
specified without
using FANUC cassette.

SR 807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface was specified


without being selected at the
option or a set value of
setting/parameter related to
I/O interface was in error.

SR 810 PTR NOT READY PTR ready signal turned off.

SR 812 OVERRUN ERROR (PTR) The next character was received


before reading a character
received by PTR.

SR 820 DR OFF (1) Data set ready signal of


reader/puncher interface 1
turned off.

SR 821 CD OFF (1) Signal quality detection signal


of reader/puncher interface 1
turned off. -

SR 822 OVERRUN ERROR (1) The next character was received


before reading a character
received by reader/puncher
interface 1.

SR 823 FRAMING ERROR (1) Stop bit of a character


received by reader/puncher
interface 1 was not detected.

SR 824 BUFFER OVERFLOW (1) Data exceeding 10 characters


(RS232C-1) were received after sending the
stop code (DC3) when the NC
receives data by reader/puncher
interface 1.

191
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SR 830 DR OFF (2) Data set ready signal of


reader/puncher interface 2
turned off.

SR 831 CD OFF (2) Signal quality detection signal


of reader/puncher interface 2
turned off.

SR 832 OVERRUN ERROR (2) The next character was received


before reading a character
received by reader/puncher
interface 2.

SR 833 FRAMING ERROR (2) Stop bit of a character


received by reader/puncher
interface 2 was not detected.

SR 834 BUFFER OVERFLOW (2) Data exceeding 10 characters


were received after sending the
stop code (DC3) when the NC
receives data by reader/puncher
interface 2.

SR 840 DR OFF (3) Data set ready signal of


reader/puncher interface 3
turned off.

SR 841 CD OFF (3) Signal quality detection signal


of reader/puncher interface 3
turned off.

SR 842 OVERRUN ERROR (3) The next character was received


before reading a character
received by reader/puncher
interface 3.

SR 843 FRAMING ERROR (3) Stop bit of a character


received by reader/puncher
interface 3 was not detected.

SR 844 BUFFER OVERLOW (3) Data exceeding 10 characters


were received after sending the
stop code when the NC receives
data by reader/puncher
interface 3.

SR 860 DATA SET READY DOWN Data set ready signal of 20 mA


(ASR33/43) current loop interface turned
of f .

SR 861 CARRIER DETECT DOWN Signal quality detection signal


(ASR33/43) of 20 mA current loop interface
turned off.

- 192 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SR 862 OVERRUN ERROR (ASR33/43) The next character was received


before reading a character
received by 20 mA current loop
interface.

SR 863 FRAMING ERROR (ASR33/44) Stop bit of a character


received by 20 mA current loop
interface was not detected.

SR 864 BUFFER OVERFLOW Characters exceeding 10


(AFR33/44) characters were received after
sending the stop code (DC3)
when the NC receives data by
20 mA current loop interface.

SR 880 NOT DRAWING Communication cannot be made


with the Graphic CPU.

SR 890 CHECK SUM ERROR (GC5) Check sum error is generated.


(High speed remote buffer)

193 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

OH 000 MOTOR OVERHEAT Servo motor is overheated. Axis


type

OH 001 LOCKER OVERHEAT NC cabinet is overheated.

Axis type error code is displayed every axis.

- 194 -

S'
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SB 010 GRAPHIC ROM PARITY A parity error occurred in


graphic ROM.

SB Oil GRAPHIC RAM PARITY A parity error occurred in


(WORK) graphic work RAM.

SB Oil GRAPHIC RAM PARITY (RED) A parity error occurred in RAM


for red graphic.

SB Oil GRAPHIC RAM PARITY A parity error occurred in RAM


(GREEN) for green graphic.

SB Oil GRAPHIC RAM PARITY A parity error occurred in RAM


(BLUE) for blue graphic.

195
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SW 000 PARAMETER ENABLE SWITCH Parameters are settable.


ON (Parameter: Data No. 8000
PWE=1)

SW 010 BUBBLE FREE MODE Free mode switch of bubble


AVAILABLE memory was turned on.

196
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

OT 001 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) When the tool was moving in the Axis
plus direction it entered the type
forbidden area of stored strole
limit 1.

OT 002 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 1) When the tool was moving in the Axis
minus direction it entered the type
forbidden area of stored strole
limit 1.

OT 003 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 2) When the tool was moving in the Axis
plus direction it entered the type
forbideen area of stored strole
limit 2.

OT 004 - OVERTRAVEL (SFOT 2) When the tool was moving in the Axis type
minus direction it entered the
forbidden are of stored strole
limit 2.

OT 005 + OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) When the tool was moving in the Axis Type
plus direction it entered the T
forbidden area of stored strole
limit 3.

OT 006 - OVERTRAVEL (SOFT 3) When the tool was moving in the Axis type
minus direction it entered the T
forbidden area of stored strole
limit 3.

OT 007 + OVERTRAVEL (HARD) Plus strole limit switch was Axis type
stepped on.

OT 008 - OVERTRAVEL (HARD) Minus strole limit switch was Axis type
stepped on.

OT 021 + OVERTRAVEL (PRE-CHECK) The tool entered the inhibited


area of the + direction in the
stroke check before move.

OT 022 - OVERTRAVEL (PRE-CHECK) The tool entered the inhibited


area of the - direction in the
stroke check before move.

OT 032 NEED ZRN (ABS PCDR) Correspondence between the


counter value of absolute pulse
coder and the machine
coordinate system does not
agree.

OT 100 SPINDLE ALARM Spindle motor alarm signal


turned on. Code showing a
cause of alarm is 0.

197
i____ I LJ L~J
Ca> i 0/3 cuu
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

OT 101 SPINDLE MOTOR OVERHEAT Spindle motor is overheated.

OT 102 EXCESS VELOCITY ERROR A deviation is excessive


between the command velocity
and the actual velocity of the
spindle motor. (15 - 20%)

OT 103 FUSE F7 BLEW Fuse F7 of the velocity control


unit of the spindle motor was
blown out.

OT 104 FUSE Fl, F2, OR F3 BLEW Fuse FI, F2 or F3 of the


velocity control unit of the
spindle motor was blown out.

OT 105 FUSE AF2 OR AF3 BLEW Fuse AF2 or AF3 of the velocity
control unit of the spindle
motor was blown out.

OT 106 EXCESS VELOCITY Spindle motor speed exceeded


(ANALOG) the maximum rating.
(Analog detection)

OT 107 EXCESS VELOCITY Spindle motor speed exceeded


(DIGITAL) the maximum rating.
(Digital detection)

OT 108 VOLTAGE (+24 V) TOO HIGH 24 V voltage of the velocity


control unit of the spindle
motor is higher than specified.

OT 109 POWER SEMICONDUCTOR Power semiconductor is


OVERLOAD overheated.

OT 110 VOLTAGE (+15 V) TOO LOW 15 V voltage of the velocity


control unit of the spindle
motor is lower than specified.

OT 111 VOLTAGE EXCESS (DC LINK) A voltage at DC link of the


velocity control unit of the
spindle motor is excessive.

OT 112 CURRENT EXCESS (DC LINK) A current flows excessively to


the DC link of the velocity
control unit of the spindle
motor.

OT 114 ROM ERROR ROM of the velocity control


unit of the spindle motor is
defective.

OT 115 OPTION ALARM Auxiliary alarm for the spindle


motor.

- 198 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

0T 116 DISCONNECTION POS CODER Position coder was detected to


have been disconnected.

OT 120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS An undefined address (high


(HIGH) division) was specified for
high-order 4 bits (EIA4 - EIA7)
of address signal of external
data I/O interface.

OT 121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS An undefined address (low


(LOW) division) was specified for
low-order 4 bits (EIAO - EIA3)
of address signal of external
data I/O interface.

OT 122 TOO MANY MESSAGE Display of five or more


external operator messages or
external alarm messages was
demanded.

OT 123 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT FOUND External operator message or


external alarm message cannot
be cancelled because the
specified message number is
missing.

OT 124 OUTPUT REQUEST ERROR Output request was made again


during external data output or
output request was made to an
address where no output data is
present.

OT 125 TOO LARGE NUMBER A numeral other than 0 - 999


was specified as a number of
the external operator message
or external alarm message.

OT 126 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT Program number or sequence


FOUND number searched with the
external data input function is
not found.

OT 127 DI.EIDHW OUT OF RANGE A value entered by external


data input signal EID32 - EID47
exceeds the maximum.

OT 128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE A value entered by external


data input signal EIDO - EID31
exceeds the maximum.

OT 129 NEGATE POS CODER CPU or peripheral circuit of


1 REV ON position coder is defective.

- >199
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

OT 130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT Program number search or


ACCEPTED sequence number search request
is not accepted (because of not
in memory mode or not in reset
status).

OT 150 A/D CONVERT ALARM A/D converter has mulfunctioned.

OT 151 A/D CONVERT ALARM A/D converter has mulfunctioned.

- 200 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PC 010 PC ERROR PMC ROM parity error occurred.

PC 020 PC ERROR PMC RAM parity error occurred.

PC 030 PC ERROR I/O unit was not correctly


allocated.

PC 500 WATCH DOG ALARM PMC watch dog alarm occurred.

PC 510 MIC TYPE MISS MATCH MIC (Machine Interface


Converter) does not match with
the setting on the PC side.

- 201 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SV 000 TACOGENERATOR DISCONNECT Tachogenerator disconnect alarm Axis type


was detected.

SV 001 EXCESS CURRENT IN SERVO Servo motor was detected to Axis type
have been overloaded.
(Overload)

SV 002 BREAKER (FEED-CTL-UNIT) Velocity control circuit Axis type


OFF breaker was turned off.

SV 003 ABNORMAL CURRENT IN SERVC An overcurrent was detected in Axis type


the velocity control circuit.

SV 004 EXCESS V TO MOTOR An overvoltage was detected in Axis type


the velocity control circuit.

SV 005 EXCESS DISCHARGE I An excessive discharge current Axis type


FROM MOTOR was detected in the velocity
control circuit.

SV 006 VELCTY-UNIT POWER A low voltage was detected in Axis type


TOO LOW the velocity control circuit.

SV 008 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) Position deviation amount Axis type


during stop is larger than the
value preset by parameter No.
1829.

SV 009 EXCESS ERROR (MOVING) Position deviation amount Axis type


during moving is larger than
the value preset by parameter
No. 1828.

SV 010 EXCESS DRIFT Drift compensation is Axis type


COMPENSATION excessive. (More than 500VELO)

SV Oil LSI OVERFLOW The position deviation amount Axis type


exceeded +32767, or the
velocity command value of DA
converter is out of a range of
-8192 - +8192. This error is
usually caused by various
setting failure.

SV 012 MOTION VALUE OVERFLOW Velocity exceeding 512K Axis type


pulse/sec (frequency converted
into detection unit) was
specified. This error is
caused by a parameter CMR or
feedrate setting failure.

SV 013 IMPROPER V-READY OFF Velocity control ready singal Axis type
(VRDY) turned off when position
control ready signal (PRDY) is
turned on.

- 202 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SV 014 IMPROPER V-READY ON Velocity control ready signal Axis type


(VRDY) turned on when position
control ready signal (PRDY) is
turned off.

SV 015 PULSE CODER DISCONNECT Pulse coder was detected to Axis type
have been disconnected.

SV 017 ILL POSITION CONTROL LSI A position control LSI trouble Axis type
was detected.

SV 018 UNFIT DSOG FREQUENCY An error was detected in the Axis type
resolver or the inductosyn
feedback frequency check.

SV 019 UNFIT PULSE OF PULSE An error was detected in the Axis type
CODER feedback pulse from pulse
coder.

SV 020 UNFIT FASE SHIFT VALUE Phase shift amount of the Axis type
resolver or inductosyn could
not be obtained correctly.

SV 021 UNFIT PULSE CODER 1 REV One-revolution signal of pulse Axis type
ON coder was turned on at an
abnormal position.

SV 022 PULSE CODER 1 REV One-revolution signal of pulse Axis type


MISSING coder was not turned on within
the allowable range.

SV 023 SV OVER LOAD Servo motor was detected to Axis type


have been overloaded.

SV 025 V-READY ON Velocity control ready signal Axis type


(INITIALIZING) (VRDY) was turned on instead of
being turned off when servo
control was turned on.

SV 026 ILLEGAL AXIS ARRANGE Parameter No. 1023 for servo


axis arrangement was not set
properly.

SV 030 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop was applied.


(In case of parameter 2001
ENR=1)

SV 100 S-COMP VALUE OVERFLOW The amount of straightness


M
compensation exceeds +32767.

- 203 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

SV 101 DATA ERROR (ABS PCDR) The absolute pulse coder is


faulty or the machine position
were not be determined
correctly because the machine
has moved considerable at the
time of power on.

- 204 -
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

10 000 BUBBLE DATA BUS PARITY A parity error of bubble memory


ERROR bus was detected.

10 001 BUBBLE TIME OUT ERROR A bubble memory read/write time


out error was detected.

10 002 BUBBLE ILLEGAL COMMAND A command undefined in the


ISSUED bubble memory control circuit
was written.

10 003 BUBBLE TRANSFER MISSING Bubble memory data transfer was


not normal.

10 010 BUBBLE MAP LOOP BROKEN Bubble memory map loop was
broken.

10 Oil BUBBLE IS ERASED OR Bubble memory was erased or


UNLOADED unloaded.

10 020 BUBBLE TOO MANY PARITY 1-bit parity occurred, and


PAGES automatically corrected page
number exceeded 16 pages.

10 021 BUBBLE DATA PARITY ERROR A parity error was detected


when data was read from the
bubble memory.

10 022 BUBBLE WRITE PROTECTED An attempt was made to write


data into the forbidden area of
the bubble memory.

10 030 CHECK SUM ERROR The check sum in the page unit
of the NC memory is in error.

10 031 INVALID CODE An invalid code was read out of


the NC memory.

10 032 MEMORY ACCESS OVER RANGE An attempt was made to write


data or read data from an
address which is out of the NC
memory range.

205
APPENDIX 10

Number Message displayed on CRT Contents Remarks

PW 000 POWER MUST BE OFF A parameter to turn off power


was once set.

PW 100 ILLEGAL PARAMETER Parameter error for


(S, I-COMP.) straightness or inclination
compensation.

- 206
APPENDIX 11

A PP EN D IX 11 W ARNING M ESSA G E L IS T

Message Meaning

EXECUTING OR MODE CHANGING Data entry is inhibited because the cycle


operating or mode changing is in progress.

KEY IN DATA Enter data via the keyboard.

FORMAT ERROR The format is wrong.

WRITE PROTECT No data can be entered because the memory


protection key (work coordinate value,
offset value, and program) is in effect,
or parameter entry is impossible because
the data number 8000 PWE used to enable
writing parameter is set to 0.

WRONG MODE The mode is not correct. Parameter input


was attempted in a mode other than MDI.
Select MDI mode.

DATA IS OUT OF RANGE Data exceeds the allowance.

TOO MANY DIGITS Data digits exceed the allowance.

START REJECTED Automatic operation start cannot be


accepted due to one of the conditions
below.
1. Automatic Operation Stop signal (*SP)
is at low level.
2. An alarm state
3. SRN signal has been issued.
4. Program start was attempted while the
same program was being edited.
5. PTR (or RS-232-C) is not in the ready
state with the tape mode selected.

LOCKED PARAMETER Data entry was tried to a locked


parameter.

DATA NOT FOUND Entered data cannot be found.

ALREADY IN USE No external I/O devices can be used


because the channels for such external I/O
devices are in use unless the operation is
terminated. This condition is cleared by
REST key.

NO PROGRAM SELECTED Editing attempted with no program


selected. Select the program by
activating the program number search or by
entering the desired program number.

- 207
APPENDIX 11

Message Meaning

EDIT REJECTED Editing is disabled while the NC unit is


in the current state. (This condition
usually occurs while the NC unit is in
operation.)

ALREADY EXISTS Program entry was attempted with the same


number as those in memory assigned.

NO MORE SPACE The memory area is full; no more programs


can be entered.

NOT EMERGENCY STOP Parameter entry was attempted in a state


other than the emergency stop state.
Select the emergency stop state.

TOO MANY PROGRAM The number of programs is out of range; no


more programs can be entered.

GUARDED WORD Editing was attempted on words that cannot


be edited (e.g., alter or delete function
was used to a program number).

NO PROGRAM NUMBER No program number is found at the


beginning of the program where the tape
registration was attempted. (This
condition occurs when the program tape
entry is commanded.)

COMMAND ILLEGAL USE The entered command cannot be used in the


current NC state. (HERE was commanded at
the beginning of the program collation, or
program restart was commanded while it was
in progress.)

PROGRAM IN OPERATION Program editing was attempted while the


program is in operation.
1. Editing was attempted with the feed
hold state.
2. Editing was attempted with the
automatic operation stop state.
3. Editing was attempted on the same
program as used in the foreground while
in the background. (If the foreground
is in reset & rewind condition, no
error occurs.)

INVISIBLE PROGRAM Cursor movement or program editing was


attempted to the display-inhibited
programs (those which are prohibited from
displaying by the parameter setting and
encripted programs.)

NO OPTION The option corresponding to the command


specified is not available.

- 208
APPENDIX 11

Message Meaning

GRAPHIC AXIS Selection parameter (#7703) fo the graphic


NUMBER NOT SET display axis is not set.

FAIL TO OCCUPY Other user, such as PMC, tried to use the


GRAPHIC CPU graphic display.

209
APPENDIX 12
A P P E N D IX 12 L IS T O F O P E R A T IO N S

Data PWE = 1
Classification Function protection , DATA , Mode selection Function key
key t J o . 8000'

Clear Tool Offset Value KEY 1 Power ON OFFSET Operation menu key -» ALL-CLR -*■ ALL , WEAR , or GEOMETRY

One Program Input (program


KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -► READ -*■ 1-PRGRM -» NEW
number not changed)

One Program Input (program


KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -» READ| -*■ (PROG#) -» Program number -» EXEC
number changed or added)
Data Input
From Tape Add Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -*■ READ 1-PRGRM -» ADD

Registration o f all programs KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key READ ALL

Emergency SW.
Pitch Error Compensation amount О ON.
SERVICE PITCH -» READ

ON: 1
MDI or
OFF: 0
210

Parameter О Emergency SERVICE PARAM -» INP-NO. -»Data No. -*• EXEC


switch ON. INPUT
+INPUT

INPUT (Absolute input) ,--------


Offset value KEY 1 OFFSET Operation menu key -»} - „ __ ,. Offset value - » ¡EXEC
Data Input l+INPUT | (Incremental input)
From MDI
HANDY (Setting relating to I/O) 1: ON
Operation menu key ~»l ——. - » ----------
I GENERAL | (Settable parameter) 10 : OFF I
Setting Data KEY 2 MDI SETTING
(VALUE)
►Data - » [ЁХЕС

ALL
Parameter, Pitch error
compensation data EDIT SERVICE Operation menu key -» ¡PUNCH | ~»| PARAM~|
¡PITCH I
Output
ALL
Offset Value EDIT OFFSET Operation menu key ~»|PUNCH] - TOOL
WRK. ZER

All Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -» PUNCH -» ALL
Data PWE = 1
Classification Function protection DATA Mode selection Function key
key No. 8000

Operation menu key -> |PUNCH| -*■|THIS| or ]PUNCH | ~»|(PROG # ) |


O utput One Program KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
-*■Program number -»IEXEC|

Program No. Search EDIT or


KEY 3 PRGRM Operation menu key ~»|FW-SRCH -*■ (PROG # ) Program number ~»|EXEC
(Programs in memory) MEMORY

Sequence No. Search EDIT or


KEY 3 PRGRM Operation menu key -> FW-SRCH -»■ (SEQ # ) “*■Sequence number ~>-|EXEC
(Sequence No. in memory) MEMORY

Sequence No. Search


TAPE PRGRM Operation menu key -> FW-SRCH -*■ (SEQ # ) -* Sequence number ->-|EXEC
Search (Sequence Nos. on tape)

Word Search CHAPTER -* TEXT -►Operation menu key -*■ FW-SRCH or BW-SRCH
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
(Words in memory) (WORD)]-» Word to be searched |EXEC|

Address Search [CHAPTER] -» ITEXTj -*■Operation menu key ~H FW-SRCH| or [BW-SRCH]


KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM
(Addresses in memory) I (WORD) -►Address to be searched ■ EXEC

Deletion o f all Programs KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key ~»| DELETE -► PROGRAM| -» IALL | -*■ EXEC
211

Currently displayed
KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key DELETE PROGRAM THIS
program
Deletion of
a Program Operation menu key - DELETE PROGRAM (PROG # )
Designated program
-*■Program number -►| EXEC

Deletion o f words, from cursor EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -*■ DELETE ~(W ORD) Word -> EXEC
KEY 3
positioned to designated word

Deletion of words from cursor


KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key DELETE ~ EOB
position to EOB
Program
Editing Deletion of one Word KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key DLT -►WRD or DELETE -*■ WORD

Alteration of a Word KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key ALTER (WORD) Word to be changed - EXEC

APPENDIX 12
Insertion of a word KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key ->■ INSERT -> (WORD) -»-Word to be inserted -*■ EXEC

All Program Memory Arrangement KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key • CONDENS ALL

Currently Selected Program


KEY 3 EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -*■ CONDENS ^ THIS
Memory Arrangement

!
I
APPENDIX 12
Data PWE = 1
Classification Function protection , DATA , Mode selection Function key
key W SOOCF

Program Designated Program Memory

I Editing Arrangement

Comparison all Programs in


KEY 3 EDIT

EDIT
PRGRM

PRGRM
Operation menu key -*| CONDENS (PROG # ) [-*Program number -*-|EXEC |

Operation menu key -*■ VERIFY -* ALL


Memory with those on Tape

Comparison one Program in


Comparison EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key ->| VERIFY - 1-PRGRM
Memory w ith that on Tape

Comparison from
EDIT PRGRM Operation menu key -* VERIFY -> HERE
) Current Position
I
212

I
;

)
APPENDIX 13

A P P E N D IX 13 L IS T O F S P E C IF IC A T IO N S

1) 10T/11T/12T

Table 1 (a) shows standard specifications, Table 1 (b) shows optional


specifications and Table 1 (c) shows optional specifications (available with
digital servo).

Table 1(a) 10/11/12T-A standard specifications (1/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Controlled axes 2 axes Same as left Same as left II-2.1

Simultaneous 2 axes Same as left Same as left II-2.1


controllable axes

Optional from
Axis name Same as left Same as left II-2.1
B, C, X, Y, Z

0.01, 0.001 mm
Increment system Same as left Same as left II-2.2
0.001, 0.0001 inch

0.005, 0.0005 mm
Appendix
Interpolation unit 0.0005, Same as left Same as left
2
0.00005 inch

Maximum commanda- Same as left Same as left Appendix


+8 digits
ble value 2

G code system A/B Yes Yes Yes II-3

Linear interpola­
Positioning tion type Same as left Same as left II-4.1
positioning is
also available

Linear interpola­
Yes Yes Yes II-4.2
tion

Multi-quadrant
circular interpo­ Yes Yes Yes II-4.3
lation

Equal lead thread


Yes Yes Yes II-5.1
cutting

Inch-thread cutting Yes Yes Yes II-5.2

Continuous thread
Yes Yes Yes II-5.5
cutting

Tangential speed
Yes Yes Yes II-6.2.1
constant control

- 213
/

APPENDIX 13

Table 1 (a) 10/11 /12T-A standard specifications (2/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 1IT-A

Cutting feedrate
For each axis Same as left Same as left II-6.2.2
clamp

Feedrate per minute Yes Yes Yes II-6.2.3

Feedrate per
Yes Yes Yes II-6.2.4
revolution

0 -254%, 0 - 150% 0 - 200%


Feedrate override II-6.3.1
1% step 10% step 10% step

Rapid traverse
F0, FI, 50%, 100% Same as left Same as left II-6.3.3
override

Rapid traverse:
Linear accelera­
Automatic ac­ tion /deceleration
celeration /de­ Cutting feed: Same as left Same as left II-6.4
celeration Exponential ac­
celeration/ de­
celeration

Exact stop, exact


stop mode, cutting Yes Yes Yes II-6.5
mode

Per second dwell


Dwell and per revolution Same as left Same as left II-6.6
dwell

Reference point Manual, automatic II-7.1


Sam as left Same as left
return A (G27, G28, G29) II-7.2

Machine coordinate
system selection Yes Yes Yes II-8.1

Work coordinate
system selection Yes Yes Yes II-8.2

Local coordinate
system setting Yes Yes Yes II-8.3

Work coordinate
system setting Yes Yes Yes II-8.2.1

Absolute/incre­ Use in the same


Yes Yes II-9.1
mental programming block

- 214
APPENDIX 13

Table 1 (a) 10/11/12T-A standard specifications (3/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item Interface Item
Interface (BMI) Interface
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Decimal point input/


pocket calculator
Yes Yes Yes II-9.3
type decimal point
input

Diameter/radius
Yes Yes Yes II-9.4
programming

S8-digit command S2-digit command


S code output 11-10.1
(Binary output) (BCD output)

T8-digit command T2-digit command


T code output II-ll.l
(Binary output) (BCD output)

Miscellaneous M8-digit command M2-digit command


11-12.1
function (Binary output) (BCD output)

Program number:
Program number/ 4 digits
Same as left Same as left 11-13.4.2
program name Program name:
16 characters

Sequence number
Yes Yes Yes II-5.2.1
search

Sequence number
5-digits Same as left Same as left II-5.2.1
display

Program number
Yes Yes Yes II-5.2.1
search

Main program/ Subprogram:


Same as left Same as left 11-13.4.1
subprogram Fourfold nested

EIA RS-244, IS0840


Appendix
Tape code automatic recogni­ Same as left Same as left
7
tion

Word-address Same as left Same as left Appendix


Tape format
format 1

Label skip Yes Yes Yes 11-13.2

Control in/out Yes Yes Yes 11-13.5

Optional block skip Yes Yes Yes 11-13.4.4

Canned cycles Yes Yes Yes 11-14.1

- 215
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(a) 10/11/12T-A standard specifications (4/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference.
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 1 IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 1IT-A

Circular interpola­
tion by radius Yes Yes Yes 11-14.5
programming

Tool offset Yes Yes Yes 11-15.1

+6 digits,
Tool compensation
common to all Yes Yes 11-15.3.2
memory A
tools

32 pairs of tool
Yes Yes Yes 11-15.3.3
compensation

Incremental offset Yes Yes Yes

Backlash compensa­ Appendix


Max. 9999 pulses Same as left Same as left
tion 6

Follow-up At emergency stop Same as left Same as left

Mechanical handle Yes Yes with Yes


feed and servo off PMC
No without
PMC

Possible on all axes with


Possible on all
Mirror image PMC. X axis only without
axes
PMC.

Control axis detach Yes No No

Memory Tape opera­


Automatic opera­ Tape, memory and operation tion, Memory
III-5
tion MDI operation MDI opera­ operation,
tion MDI operatior

Cycle start/feed
Yes Yes Yes II-5.5.4
hold

Buffer register Yes Yes Yes

Program stop/
Yes Yes Yes
program end

Reset/rewind Yes No Yes

Manual continuous Yes


Yes Yes III-4.2
feed

- 216
APPENDIX 13

Table 1 (a) 10/11/12T-A standard specifications (5/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface
10T-A 1IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Move distance per xl, xlO, xl, xlO,


step is: xl, xlO, xlOO, xlOOO xlOO, xlOOO,
Incremental feed xlOO, xlOOO, with PMC xl, xlOOOO, III-4.3
xlOOOO, xlOOOOO xlO without xlOOOOO
PMC

Manual absolute Yes Yes with Yes III-4.5


on/off PMC
No without
PMC

All axes machine


Yes Yes Yes III-6.1
lock

Machine lock on Yes Yes with Yes with III-6.2


each axis PMC PMC
No without No without
PMC PMC

Auxiliary function Yes Yes with Yes III-6.3


lock PMC
No without
PMC

Dry run Yes Yes Yes III-6.4

Single block Yes Yes Yes III-6.5

Keyboard type
manual data input
9" monochrome Same as left Same as left III-2.1
(MDI), CRT charactei
display

Data protection key 3 types 1 type 1 type III-10.7

Part program storage


Yes Yes Yes III-9
& editing

Background editing Yes Yes Yes IV-9.7

No. of registerable
program (Program 50 100 50 50 100 III-9.8
name display pos­
sible)

CMOS Bubble Bubble CMOS CMOS Bubble


Part program memory memory
memory memory memory memory III-9.9
storage length 80 m 60 m
20 m 20 m 20 m 80 m

- 217
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(a) 10/11/12T-A standard specifications (6/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Self-diagnosis
Yes Yes Yes
functions

Emergency stop Yes Yes Yes

Overtravel Yes +LZ only Yes

Stored stroke
Yes Yes Yes 11-18
check 1

Each axis/all axes/


all axes in auto­
Each axis,
matic operation/ All axes or
Interlock Cutting block
block start/ Z axis only
start
cutting block
start interlock

CNC ready, servo


ready, rewinding,
alarm, distribu­ CNC ready,
tion end, auto­ servo ready,
matic operation, rewinding,
automatic opera­ alarm,
tion start lamp, distribution
Status output feed hold, reset, end, auto­ Same as left
imposition, rapid matic opera­
traversing, tap­ tion, auto­
ping, thread cut­ matic opera­
ting, constant tion start
surface speed lamp, feed
control, inch hold, reset
input, and DI
status output

External power
Yes Yes Yes
on/off

Connectable servo FANUC AC SERVO


Same as left Same as left
motor MOTOR series, etc.

Connectable servo PWM transistor


Same as left Same as left
unit drive, etc.

Connectable posi­ Pulse coder/


Same as left Same as left
tion detector optical scale

Connectable spindle FANUC AC SPINDLE


Same as left Same as left
motor MOTOR series

218
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(a) 10/11/12T-A standard specifications (7/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Connectable spindle PWM transistor


Same as left Same as left
servo unit drive

200VAC +10%, -15%,


50/60Hz +lHz or
Power Same as left Same as left
220VAC +10%, -15%,
60Hz +2Hz,
single phase

- 219
APPENDIX 13

Table 1 (b) 10/11 /12T-A optional specifications (1/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 1IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Max. 4 Max. 5 Max. 8 Max. 4 Max. 4


axes axes axes axes axes
and and and and and
Controlled axes
spin­ spin­ spin­ No spin­ spin­ II-2
expansion
dle dle dle dle dle
con­ con­ con­ con­ con­
trol trol trol trol trol

Simultaneously Max. all


Max. all control­
controlled No controlled II-2
led axes
axes expansion axes

G code system C Yes Yes Yes II-3

Hypothetical axis
No Yes No No Yes II-4.4
interpolation

Variable lead
Yes Yes Yes II-5.3
thread cutting

Circular thread
No Yes No No Yes II-5.4
cutting

Thread cutting
Yes Yes Yes
cycle retract

2nd feedrate
Yes No No
override

Linear accelera­
tion /deceleration
Yes Yes Yes II-6.4.2
before cutting
feed interpolation

T4 digits (BCD) No No No Yes

Automatic corner
No Yes No No Yes II-6.5.4
override

2nd 2nd
refer­ 2nd refer­
2nd to 4th refer­ ence reference ence
Yes Yes II-7.3
ence point return point point re­ point
return turn only return
only only

- 220
APPENDIX 13

Table 1 (b) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (2/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

G10, tool offset


amount, work zero
Programmable data point offset II-8.2.4
Same as left Same as left
input amount can be 11-14.6
changed by
programming

Inch/metric
Yes Yes Yes II-9.2
conversion

Spindle speed Spindle speed Spindle speed


binary code/ analog output analog output Yes
analog output and spindle and spindle (Up to
and spindle speed clamp (G92) speed clamp 30,000
speed clamp (Up to 99999999 (G92) (Up to rpm)
rpm) 30000 rpm)

Constant surface
Yes Yes Yes II-10.2
speed control

Actual spindle
Yes No No
speed output

Spindle position­
Yes No Yes II-10.3
ing

Tool life management Yes No Yes II-11.2

2nd auxiliary func­


tion (Address A, B,
8 digits
or C which is not No No 11-12.2
(Binary output)
of controlled axis
can be assigned.)

Optional block skip


Yes No Yes 11-13.4.4
addition (2 to 9)

Multiple repetitive
canned cycles for Yes Yes Yes 11-14.2
turning

Canned cycles for


Yes No No Yes 11-14.3
drilling

Chamfering/corner R Yes Yes Yes 11-14.4

Programmable mirror
Yes Yes Yes 11-14.6
image

2 2 1
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(b) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (3/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 1IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A LIT-A

Mirror image for


Yes Yes Yes 11-14.7
double turrets

Direct drawing No Yes No No Yes


dimensions (Note (Note 1) (Note 11-14.8
programming 1) 1)

Tool nose radius


Yes Yes Yes 11-15.2
compensation

Geometry/wear
Tool offset amount offset. Used in
Same as left Same as left 11-15.3.2
memory B common to all
offsets.

64 tool compensa­
Yes Yes Yes 11-15.3.3
tions

Stored pitch error Appendix


Yes Yes Yes
compensation 6

Skip function Yes Yes Yes 11-16.1

High-speed skip
Yes Yes Yes
signal input

Automatic tool
Yes No Yes 11-16.2
offset

High-speed measuring
position reach Yes Yes Yes
signal input

Yes with PMC


Direct input of
No position 11-16.3
offset value Yes Yes
record signal
measured
without PMC

Tool offset value Yes Yes with Yes with 11-16.4


measured input B PMC PMC
No without No without
PMC PMC

Yes Yes Yes


(DI/DO=16/16
with PMC
Custom macro 11-17
(DI/DCM128/128) No DI/DO iDI/DO=16/16)
without PMC)

Note 1) Available for 10T-Á with digital servo.

2 2 2
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(b) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (4/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface
10T-A 1IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Custom macro common 150/ 200/300 150/200 150/ 200/300 11-17.2.3


variables 250 200

Interruption type
No Yes No No Yes 11-17.6
custom macro

Key and program


Yes Yes Yes
coding

Synchronous opera­
No No Yes No No
tion

Hybrid control No No Yes No No

Double check system No No Yes No No

Feed stop No No Yes No No

Sequence number
Yes Yes Yes III-5.5.6
comparison and stop

Program restart Yes No Yes III-5.6.1

Restart of block Yes No Yes with III-5.6.2


PMC
No without
PMC

Manual handle Yes Yes with Yes III-5.7.1


interruption PMC
No without
PMC

Au toma tic/manual
simultaneous Yes No No III-5.7.2
operation

Manual handle feed


Yes Yes Yes
(1st)

Manual handle feed


Yes Yes Yes
(2nd, 3rd)

Manual numerical
Yes Yes Yes III-4.5
command

14" color CRT Yes Yes Yes III-2.1

Run hour display Yes Yes Yes

- 223
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(b) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (5/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 1IT-A

Menu switch Yes No Yes Yes III-10.9

Yes with Yes


Software operator’s PMC with
panel Yes No No with­ PMC No 111-10.11
out PMC No
with­
out
PMC

Simple conversa­
tional automatic Yes No Yes Yes No
programming
function

External position
No Yes No No Yes III-11.7
display

Extended part
Yes Yes Yes
program editing

No. of registered 100/20C 200/400 100/200 200/ III-9.8


programs 400

Max. Max. Max. Max.


Part program 80m 3840mm 5120mm Max. 80m 3840mm
storage length CMOS Bubble Bubble III-9.9
CMOS memory Bubble
memory memory memory memory

Play back Yes Yes No

External I/O device


Yes No No
control

Tape reader without


Yes Yes Yes III-2.3.1
reels

Reader/puncher Yes Yes


interface

Bubble cassette
Yes Yes Yes
and adaptor
III-2.4
Floppy cassette and III-13
Yes Yes Yes
adaptor

FANUC PPR Yes Yes Yes III-2.5

Portable tape
Yes Yes Yes III-2.3.3
reader

- 224
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(b) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (6/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 1IT-A

Stroke check before


Yes Yes Yes III-7.3
move

Door interlock Yes Yes Yes

External decelera­ Yes with PMC,


Yes No
tion No without
PMC

Moving signal, Yes with PMC,


move direction Yes No No without
signal PMC

Input/output of Input of
tool offset amount, tool
work coordinate offset
shift amount, Input of tool amount,
machine coordinate offset work coor­
External data system shift amount, work dinate shift
input/output amount, alarm coordinate amount,
message, operator shift machine zero
message, program amount, with point shift
number search, PMC amount, alarm
sequence number message,
search, custom No without program
macro variables PMC number search
are available.

External work
31 works 15 works 31 works
number search

NC window Yes No No

Multi-tap 200/220/230/240/
transformer 380/415/400/460/ Same as left Same as left
480/550 VAC

Resolver/inductosyn
Yes Yes No No Yes
interface

Synclonous/ Yes No No III-18.1


independent
switching function

Spindle speed Yes Yes Yes II-10.4


fluctuation
detection function

225
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(b) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (7/7)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 1IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 1IT-A

Display of number Yes Yes Yes III-11.9


of parts

Absolute position Yes Yes Yes


detecting function

Programmable Yes Yes Yes 11-15.4


parameter input

Key input from Yes No No 11-20


PMC

Extended custom Yes Yes Yes 11-17.7


macro

NC window B Yes No No

Portable tape Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


reader rewinding (Note (Note (Note
2) 2) 2)

Note 2) Available for 11T-A/12T-A with digital servo.

- 2 2 6 -
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(c) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (with digital servo) (1/2)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface
10T-A 11T-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Polar coordinate Yes Yes Yes II-4.5


interpolation

Cylindrical Yes Yes Yes II-4.6


interpolation

Turret indexing Yes No No Yes with 11.3


PMC
No without
PMC

160 sets of tool No Yes No No Yes 11-15.3.3


offset

Direct drawing Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 11-14.8


dimensions (Note 1) (Note 1)
programming

Graphic display A Yes Yes Yes II-11.6


funciton

600 sets of
custom macro No Yes No No Yes 11-17.2.3
common variables

Feed stop No Yes Yes No No Yes


(Note 1) (Note 1)

Optional command Yes Yes Yes App. 6


multiply

Part program Max. Max. Max. Max. 480m Max. Max. III-9.9
storage length 480m 3,840m 5,120m 480m 3,840m
(Notel) (Notel) (Note 1)

Double CRT/MDI No Yes No No


control

Manual feed per Yes Yes No


revolution

Display of
directory of Yes Yes Yes II-11.8
floppy cassette

Note 1) Available with/without digital servo.

227
APPENDIX 13

Table 1(c) 10/11/12T-A optional specifications (with digital servo) (2/2)

Functions
Basic Machine 3 6 Reference
Item
Interface (BMI) Interface Interface Item
10T-A 1IT-A 12T-A 10T-A 10T-A 11T-A

Portable tape Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes


reader rewinding (Note 1' (Note 1) (Note 1)
_______

Note 1) Available with/without digital servo.

- 228
APPENDIX 13

2) 10M/11/M/12M

Table 2(a) shows standard specifications, Table 2(b) shows optional


specifications and Table 2(c) shows optional specifications (available with
digital servo).

Table 2 (a) 10/11/12M-A standard specifications (1/4)

Functions
Reference
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
item
Том | Пм | П м 10M Io m | TTm
Controlled axes 2/3 axes Same as left Same as left II-2

Simultaneous controllable
2 axes Same as left Same as left II-2.1
axes

Optional from X, Y, Z, U,
Axis name
V, W, А, В, C Same as left Same as left II-2.2

0.01, 0.001 mm Appendix


Increment system Same as left Same as left
0.001, 0.0001 inch 2

0.005, 0.0005 mm Appendix


Interpolation unit Same as left Same as left
0.0005, 0.00005 inch .2

Appendix
Maximum commandable value +8 digits Same as left Same as left
2

Linear interpolation type


Positioning positioning is also Same as left Same as left I1-4,1
available

Linear interpolation YES YES YES II-4.3

Multi-quadrant circular
YES YES YES II-4.4
interpolation

240m/min or 24m/min,
Rapid traverse rate Same as left Same as left II-6. 1
240001pm or 2400imp

Tangential speed constant


YES YES YES II-6.2. 1
control

Cutting feedrate clamp For each axis Same as left Same as left II-6.2.2

Feed per minute YES YES YES II-6.2.3

0 - 150% 0 - 200%
Feedrate override 0 - 254%, 1% step II-6.3. 1
10% step 10% step

Rapid traverse override - F0, FI, 50%, 100% Same as left Same as left II-6.3.3

Rapid traverse:
Linear acceleration/
Automatic acceleration/ deceleration Same as left Same as left 11-6.4
deceleration Cutting feed:
Exponential acceleration/
deceleration

YES
Exact stop/cutting mode (Tapping mode
Tapping mode YES signal is not YES 11-6.5
available)

Per second dwell and per


Dwell Same as left Same as left II-6.6
revolution dwell

Manual, automatic
Reference point return A Same as left Same as left 11-7
(G27, G28, G29)

229
APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (a) 10/11/12M-A standard specifications (2/4)

Functions
Item Reference
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
item
To m I TTm | mi 10M 10M | 11M
Machine coordinate system
YES YES YES II— 8.1
selection (G53)

Work coordinate system


YES YES YES II-8.2.2
selection (G54 - G59)

Local coordinate system


YES YES YES II-8.3
setting (G52)

Work coordinate system


YES YES YES II-8.2.1
change (G92)

Absolute/incremental Can be combined in


Same as left Same as left II-9.1
programming the same block

Decimal point input/


pocket calculator type YES YES YES II-9.4
decimal point input

S8-digit S2-digit
S code output command command Same as left II-10.1
(Binary output) (BCD output)

T8-digit T2-digit
T code output command command Same as left 11-11.1
(Binary output) (BCD output)

M3-digit (BCD)
M8-digit command M2-digit output) with PMC.
Miscellaneous function (Binary output) (BCD output) M2-digit (BCD 11-12.1
output) without
PMC

Program number/ Program number: 4 digits


Same as left Same as left 11-13.4
Program name Program name: 16 characters

Program number search YES YES YES III-5.2.1

Main program/subprogram Subprogram: Fourfold nesting Same as left Same as left 11-13.4.1

Sequence number display 5-digit Same as left Same as left TI-5.2.1

Sequence number search YES YES YES II-5.2.1

ETA RS244, IS0840


Tape code Same as left Same as left 11-13.9
automatic recognition

Tape format Word-address format Same as left Same as left 11-13.8

Label skip YES YES YES 11-13.2

Control in/out YES YES YES 11-13.5

Optional block skip YES YES YES 11-13.4.4

Radius designation on arc YES YES YES 11-14.5

Tool length compensation YES YES YES 11-15.1

Tool offset amount +6 digits, common to


Same as left Same as left 11-15.5.1
memory A all tools, 32 pairs

Appendix
Backlash compensation Max. 9999 pulses Same as left Same as left
6
APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (a) 10/11/12M-A standard specifications (3/4)

Functions Reference
Item FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) item
TÖM | H M 1 T2M 10M Io m I Tim
Follow-up At emergency stop Same as left Same as left

Servo off and YES with PMC


YES YES
mechanical handle feed NO without PMC

Possible on Possible on all


all axes axes with PMC
External mirror image Possible on all axes
with PMC X and Y axes
NO without PMC only without PMC

Controlled axis detach YES NO NO

Tape Operation/ Memory Tape operation,


Automatic operation Memory Operation/ operation Memory operation, III-5
MDI Operation MDI operation MDI operation

Cycle start/feed hold YES YES YES

Buffer register YES YES YES

Program stop/program end YES YES YES

Reset and rewind YES NO YES

Manual continuous feed YES YES YES III-4.2

Move distance per step is:


XI, X10, X100,
XI, X10, X100, X1000, XI, X10, X100,
X1000, X10000, III-4.3
Incremental feed X10000, X100000 of the X1000
X100000
increment System

YES with PMC


Manual absolute on/off YES YES III-4.5
NO without PMC

Machine lock on all axes YES YES YES III-6.1

YES with PMC


Machine lock on each YES with PMC
YES Z axis only III-6.2
axis
NO without PMC
without PMC

YES with PMC


Auxiliary function lock YES NO III-6.3
NO without PMC

Dry run YES YES YES III-6.4

Single block YES YES YES HI-6.5

Keyboard type manual data


input (MDI), CRT charac­ 9” monochrome Same as left Same as left III-2.1
ter display

Data protection key 3 types 1 type 1 type III-IO.7

Part program storage


YES YES YES III-9
& editing

Background editing YES YES YES III-9.7

Registerable programs
(Program name display 50 100 50 50 100 HI-9.8
is also possible)

231
APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (a) 10/11/12M-A standard specifications (4/4)

Functions
Item Reference
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
item
I0M 11M 12M 10M 10M ' 11M
CMOS Bubble Bubble CMOS CMOS Bubble
Part program storage
memory memory memory memory memory memory III-9.9
length
20m 80m 60m 20m 20m 80m

Self-diagnosis functions YES YES YES

Emergency stop YES YES YES III-7.1

Overtravel YES NO YES III-7.2

Stored stroke check 1 YES YES YES 11-18

Each axis/all axes/all axes


Interlock in automatic operation/ All axes or Each axis, cut­
block start/cutting block Z-axis only ting block start
start interlock

NC ready,
NC ready, servo ready, servo ready,
rewinding, alarm, distribu­ rewinding,
tion end, automatic opera­ alarm, dis­
ting, automatic operation tribution
Status output start lamp, feed hold, end, auto­ Same as left
reset, inposition, rapid matic opera­
traversing, tapping, tion, auto­
constant surface speed matic opera­
control, inch input, and tion start
DI status output, lamp, feed
hold, reset

External power on/off YES YES YES

FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR


Connectable servo motor Same as left Same as left
series etc.

Connectable servo unit PWM transistor drive, etc, Same as left Same as left

Connectable position
Pulse coder/optical scale Same as left Same as left
detector

FANUC AC SPINDLE MOTOR


Connectable spindle motor Same as left Same as left
series

Connectable spindle
PWM transistor drive Same as left Same as left
servo unit

200VAC +10%, -15%, 50/60Hz


Power +lHz or 220VAC +10%, -15%, Same as left Same as left
60+lHz
APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (b) 10/11/12M-A optional specifications (1/5)

Functions Reference
item FS6 Interface
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface
item
10M 11M 12M 10M 10M 11M

Controlled axes expansion Max. 4 Max. 5 Max. 15 Max. 4 Max, 5


Name of axes: axes plus axes plus axes plus axes plus axes plus
NO
Select from X,Y,Z,A,B,C, spindle spindle spindle spindle spindle 11-2
U,V,W axis optionally control control control control control

Simultaneously control­ Max, simultaneously 11-2


Same as left Same as left
lable axes expansion controlled axes

Single direction NO YES II-4.2


NO YES NO
positioning

Not applied Also applied


Also applied to
Helical interpolation to addition­ to addition­ II-4.5
additional axes
al axes al axes

Hypothetical axis NO
NO YES NO YES I1-4.6
interpolation

Thread cutting,
continuous threading, YES YES YES II-5
synchronous feed

Inverse time feed NO YES NO NO II-6.2.5

Fl-digit feed YES NO YES II-6.2.6

2nd feedrate override YES NO NO 11-6.3.2

Linear acceleration/
decleration before cut­ YES YES YES II-6.4.2
ting feed interpolation

Automatic corner override NO YES NO NO YES I1-6.5.5

2nd re­ 2nd re­ 2nd re­


2nd to 4th reference ference ference ference
point return point YES point point YES II-7.3
return return return

G10, tool offset amount,


work zero point offset
Programmable data input amount can be changed by Same as left Same as left II-8.2.4
programming

Polar coordinate command NO YES NO NO YES II-9.2

Inch/metric conversion YES YES YES II-9.3

Spindle speed
analog output YES
Spindle speed binary/ Spindle speed analog output plus spindle (S command
analog output/spindle plus spindle speed clamp speed clamp should be
speed clamp (G92) (G92) (S command should be (G92) (S com­ within
within 99999999rpm) mand should 30000rpm)
(Note 1) be within
30000rpm)

Constant surface speed


YES YES YES II-10.2
control

Actual spindle speed


YES NO NO
output

T code Output
NO (Note 2) NO YES
(BCD 4-digit)

233
r~

APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (b) 10/11/12M-A optional specifications (2/5)

Item Functions
Reference
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
item
I0M | 11M | 12M 10M IÖM ! TÏM
Tool life management YES NO YES II-11.2

2nd auxiliary function BCD 3 digits


(select address from 8 digits (with FMC)
A, B, C, U, V, W other (Binary output) N0 BCD 3 digits 11-12.2
than controlled axes (without PMC)
address)

Optional block skip


YES NO YES 11-13.4.4
addition

Canned cycles (G73, G74,


YES YES YES 11-14.1
G76, G80 - G89)

Optional angle chamfering 11-14.3


YES YES YES
/corner R 11-14.4

Programmable mirror image YES YES YES 11-14.6

Tool offset
YES YES YES 11-15.2
G45 - G48)

Cutter compensation B YES YES YES 11-15.3

Cutter compensation C YES YES YES 11-15.3

Three dimensional tool


NO YES NO NO YES 11-15.4
compensation

+6 digits, geometry/wear
Tool offset amount
memory, 32 pairs, common to Same as left Same as left 11-15.5.2
memory B
all types of offsets

+6 digits, geometry/wear
Tool offset amount
memory, length/radius offset Same as left Same as left 11-15.5.3
memory C
memory, 32 pairs

Additional tool offset Total Total 99/200 Total Total Total 99/
11-15.6
pairs 99 pairs paris 99 pairs 99 pairs 200 pairs

Stored pitch error Appendix


YES YES YES
compensation 6

Appendix
Inclination compensation NO YES NO NO YES
6

Appendix
Straightness compensation NO YES NO NO YES
6

Scaling NO YES NO NO YES 11-15.8

(Note 1) S8-digit (Binary code output) is available as a standard feature in case of Basic Machine
Interface (BMI).

(Note 2) T8-digit (Binary code output) is available as a standard feature in case of Basic Machine
Interface (BMI).

234
A P P E N D I X 13

T ab le 2 (Ы 1 0 /1 1/12M -A optional sp ecificatio ns (3/5)

Functions Reference
Item Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
item
10M ГШ 1 I2M 10M ЮМ 1 1ш
YES N0 NO YES 11-15.9
Coordinate system rotation N0

YES YES YES 11-16. 1


Skip function

YES NO NO 11-16.2
Multi-step skip function

High-speed skip signal


YES YES YES
input

Automatic tool length YES N0 NO 11-16.3


measurement

High-speed measuring
position reach signal YES YES YES
input

YES(with PMC)
No position
Tool length measurement YES YES 111-10,8
record
(without PMC)

YES
DI/D0=I6/16
(with PMC)
Custom macro YES (DT/D0-128/128) YES (DI/DO-16/16) IT-17
No 0 1 / 0 0
(without PMC)

Custom macro common 150/250 200/300 150/200 150/200 200/300


variable variables variables variables variables variables

Interruption type NO YES 11-17.6


N0 YES NO
custom macro

Key and program coding YES YES YES

Parallel axis control NO YES N0 N0

Synchronous operation N0 YES N0 N0

Hybrid control N0 YES N0 N0


Double check system N0 YES N0 N0

F e e d s to p NO YES N0 N0

Sequence number
c o m p a r i s o n and stop YES YES YES 111-5.5.6

Program restart YES N0 YES m -5 .6 . i

Restart of block YES YES (with PMC)


N0
NO (without PMC)
III-5 .6 .2

Manual Handle YES(with PMC)


YES YES
interruption N0 1 П -5 .7 Л
(without PMC)

Automatic/manual
simultaneous operation YES N0 NO 1П-5.7.2

Manual handle feed (1st) YES YES YES III-4.4

235
APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (b) 10/11/12M-A optional specifications (5/5)

Functions
Item Reference
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) FS3 Interface FS6 Interface
item
Tom | TIm l i2M 10M To m 1 H m
Stroke check before move YES YES y es

Door interlock YES YES YES

Applied only to
External deceleration Applied to all axes NO
X, Y, Z axes

Moving signal output, YES (with PMC)


moving direction signal YES NO N0 (without PMC)
output

Inputs of tool Input of tool off­


Input/output of tool offset offset amount set amount, work
amount, work zero offset and work zero zero offset value,
External data input/ value, machine coordinate offset value machine coordinate
output system shift amount, alarm are available system shift
message, operator message, (with PMC) amount, alarm mes-
program number search, message, operator
sequence number search and N0 (without message and pro­
custom macro variable are PMC) gram number search
variable are available

External work number


31 points 15 points 31 points
search

NC window YES NO NO

Resolver/inductosyn
interface NO YES NO NO YES

200/220/230/240/380/415/
Multi-tap transfer Same as left Same as left
440/460/480/550VAC

237
APPENDIX 13

Table 2 (c) 10/11/12M-A optional specifications


(Available with digital servo)

Functions Reference
Item 6M Interface
Basic Machine Interface (BMI) 3M Interface item
10M ИМ 1 12M 10M 10M 11M
Helical interpolation B NO YES NO NO YES II-4.6

Polar coordinate
YES YES YES II-4.8
interpolation

Cylindrical interpolation YES YES YES I1-4.9

Exponential function
NO YES NO NO YES 11-4. 10
interpolation

Circular threading B NO YES NO NO YES II-4.11

Linear acceleration/
deceleration after cutting NO YES NO NO YES II-6.4.3
feed interpolation

Additional work YES YES II-8.2.5


YES
coordinate systems

Tool compensation NO NO YES


NO YES 11-15.5
999 entries

Coordinate rotation YES YES (Note 1) YES YES YES 11-15.9


(Note 1)

Scalling YES YES (Note 1) YES YES YES 11-15.8


(Note 1)

Tool offset by tool number NO YES NO NO YES 11-15.10

Tool length/work YES with PMC


zero point mea surement B YES YES with PMC
N0 without III-10.9
NO without PMC
PMC

Custom macro common


variables NO YES NO NO YES 11-17
600 variables

High speed remote buffer


NO YES NO NO YES 11-18.3
operation

Automatic corner
deceleration NO YES NO NO

Feedrate clamp by
NO YES NO NO YES 11-18.4
circular radius

Feed stop NO YES YES NO NO YES


(Note I) (Note 1)

Optional command
YES YES YES
multiply

Axis switching NO YES NO NO YES 11-20.2

Part program storage Max. Max. Max. Max. Max. Max.


length 480m 3840m 5120m 480m 480m 3840m II-9.9
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

Graphic display A YES YES YES II-11.6

Two CRT/MDI control NO YES NO NO

Directory display
YES YES YES III-ll.11
of floppy cassette

Rewinding of portable YES YES YES


YES YES
tape reader (Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)

(Note 1) Available without digital servo.

238

You might also like